iAN8K B1000

Release 3.2 Operations Manual

Hardware Platform: iAN8K B1000

Issue 1.1

iAN8K B1000
Release 3.2 Operations Manual

Hardware Platform: iAN8K B1000

Issue 1.1

Copyright 2006, UTStarcom, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation) without prior written permission from UTStarcom, Inc. UTStarcom, Inc. reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of UTStarcom, Inc. to provide notification of such revision or change. UTStarcom, Inc. provides this documentation without warranty of any kind, either implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. UTStarcom may make improvements or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGENDS: If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following: United States Government Legend: All technical data and computer software is commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense. Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in UTStarcom's standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is applicable. You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in, or delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide. UTStarcom, the UTStarcom logo, !-Volution, AIRSTAR, AN-2000, AN-FTTB, CommWorks, the CommWorks logo, iAN, iCell, Internode, Intranode, iPATH, ISP, MovingMedia, mSwitch, Next Generation Network Technology. Now, NGDLC, PAS, PAS Wireless, Seamless World, Softexchange, Sonata, Sonata Access Tandem, Sonata HLR, Sonata IP, Sonata MSC, Sonata WLL, Telos, Total Control, Unitech, WACOS, WICOPS, WLL, and Xtreme IP are registered trademarks or trademarks of UTStarcom, Inc. and its subsidiaries. Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of the Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and NetMeeting are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Sun, Java, and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. HP, HP-UX, and HP Openview are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Hewlett-Packard Company. Other brand and product names may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.

CONTENTS

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Order of Tasks.......................................................................................................................... 23 Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 23 Notices................................................................................................................................ 24 Figures and Screen Captures............................................................................................. 24 Text ..................................................................................................................................... 24 Related Documentation............................................................................................................ 25 Contacting Customer Service .................................................................................................. 25 Contacting Technical Documentation....................................................................................... 25

NETWORK MANAGEMENT
System Structure...................................................................................................................... 27 Functional Components ........................................................................................................... 27 Primary Management Functions .............................................................................................. 28 Basic Management Functions ............................................................................................ 28 Topology Management.................................................................................................. 28 Fault Management ........................................................................................................ 28 Security Management ................................................................................................... 28 Log Management .......................................................................................................... 28 System Tools................................................................................................................. 29

DEVICE MANAGER
Configuration Menu.................................................................................................................. 33 Get Configuration ............................................................................................................... 33 Save Configuration ............................................................................................................. 33 Erase Configuration............................................................................................................ 33 Erase Shelf Configuration................................................................................................... 34 System Log......................................................................................................................... 34 System Log Data........................................................................................................... 37 Radius Server..................................................................................................................... 40 RADIUS Server ............................................................................................................. 41 Statistics ........................................................................................................................ 42 Telnet Port .......................................................................................................................... 43 Maximum Power Setting..................................................................................................... 44 Packet Count Reset............................................................................................................ 45 Node ID .............................................................................................................................. 45 iSmart Feature.................................................................................................................... 46 LTC Configure .................................................................................................................... 47 Profile Menu............................................................................................................................. 50 ADSL Line Profile ............................................................................................................... 50

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Configuration Template ................................................................................................. 50 Service Profile............................................................................................................... 51 Spectrum Profile............................................................................................................ 53 SHDSL Line Profile ............................................................................................................ 58 Ethernet PM Profile ............................................................................................................ 61 ADSL PM Profile ................................................................................................................ 63 Access List Profile .............................................................................................................. 65 Packet Priority Classification .............................................................................................. 70 Traffic Management Profile ................................................................................................ 78 Batch Menu.............................................................................................................................. 81 Create ATM VC .................................................................................................................. 81 Delete ATM VC................................................................................................................... 83 Module Configuration ......................................................................................................... 84 Video Service Menu................................................................................................................. 87 Multicast Group Packaging ................................................................................................ 88 Default Rate .................................................................................................................. 88 Multicast Group............................................................................................................. 89 Multicast Package......................................................................................................... 91 Access Control ................................................................................................................... 92 Account lockout Policy .................................................................................................. 92 Reset Period ................................................................................................................. 93 User Account ................................................................................................................ 94 Usage Statistics.................................................................................................................. 96 Call Usage Recognition Time........................................................................................ 96 Usage Statistics ............................................................................................................ 96 Tools Menu .............................................................................................................................. 97 MAC Tracing....................................................................................................................... 97

PROVISIONING - NODE
System ..................................................................................................................................... 99 IP Address ............................................................................................................................. 100 Time Server ........................................................................................................................... 103 NMP Access .......................................................................................................................... 104 SNMP ............................................................................................................................... 105 Telnet................................................................................................................................ 106 ARP ....................................................................................................................................... 107 Routing Table ......................................................................................................................... 109 Reset ......................................................................................................................................111 Master Shelf Configuration .................................................................................................... 114 Slave Shelves Configuration.................................................................................................. 116 Linecard Image File Information ............................................................................................ 118

PROVISIONING - ICM3/3G MODULE

Node Level Configuration ...................................................................................................... 123 Reset ................................................................................................................................ 123 Module Summary................................................................................................................... 124

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Shelf Level Configuration....................................................................................................... 126 Slot Level Configuration......................................................................................................... 128 ICM3/3G ........................................................................................................................... 129 Forwarding Database ....................................................................................................... 130 Mirror Port......................................................................................................................... 132 Trunk Group...................................................................................................................... 134 Protection Link.................................................................................................................. 137 Redundancy Support........................................................................................................ 139 Redundancy Setup via CLI ......................................................................................... 143 Switchover ........................................................................................................................ 144 VBAS ................................................................................................................................ 145 External Ethernet Port ...................................................................................................... 147 Port Level Configuration ........................................................................................................ 148 Ethernet Port Configuration .............................................................................................. 149 Internal Ethernet Ports ................................................................................................ 150 External Ethernet Ports ............................................................................................... 152 Trunk Ports.................................................................................................................. 155 RSTP ................................................................................................................................ 158 RSTP........................................................................................................................... 158 RSTP Port ................................................................................................................... 160 VLAN ................................................................................................................................ 162 General ....................................................................................................................... 165 VLAN Setup ................................................................................................................ 167 Routed VLAN Interface ............................................................................................... 170 In-band Management .................................................................................................. 173 Multicast ........................................................................................................................... 175 IGMP Snooping........................................................................................................... 178 General .................................................................................................................. 178 Group Membership ................................................................................................ 179 IGMP Proxy................................................................................................................. 180 General .................................................................................................................. 180 Group Membership ................................................................................................ 181 PIM-SM ....................................................................................................................... 182 General .................................................................................................................. 182 RP Router .............................................................................................................. 183 Multicast Routing Table ......................................................................................... 185 Neighbor Details .................................................................................................... 185 Interface Setup ...................................................................................................... 186 Routing ............................................................................................................................. 188 RIP .............................................................................................................................. 191 General .................................................................................................................. 191 Redistribution Setup .............................................................................................. 192 Neighbor Setup...................................................................................................... 194 Peer Details ........................................................................................................... 195 Key Setup .............................................................................................................. 196 Interface Setup ...................................................................................................... 198 OSPF .......................................................................................................................... 201
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

General.................................................................................................................. 201 Route Redistribution .............................................................................................. 203 Area Setup............................................................................................................. 205 Address Ranges .................................................................................................... 208 LSDB Table............................................................................................................ 209 Neighbor Details .................................................................................................... 212 Interface Setup ...................................................................................................... 213 ARP............................................................................................................................. 216 DHCP ............................................................................................................................... 219 Server ......................................................................................................................... 219 Profile.......................................................................................................................... 220 Subnet Mapping.......................................................................................................... 224 Pool............................................................................................................................. 226 Map ............................................................................................................................. 228 Lease .......................................................................................................................... 230 Option 60 .................................................................................................................... 231 Option 82 .................................................................................................................... 233 VLAN........................................................................................................................... 234 Packet Classification ........................................................................................................ 236 Masks.......................................................................................................................... 236 Actions ........................................................................................................................ 239 Meters ......................................................................................................................... 242 Flow Counters............................................................................................................. 243 Rules........................................................................................................................... 244 QoS .................................................................................................................................. 246 Priority......................................................................................................................... 247 DSCP Priority.............................................................................................................. 248 Queue Mapping .......................................................................................................... 250 L2 Scheduling ............................................................................................................. 252

PROVISIONING - PCU MODULE

Node Level Configuration ...................................................................................................... 255 Reset ................................................................................................................................ 255 Module Summary................................................................................................................... 256 Shelf Level Configuration....................................................................................................... 257 Slot Level Configuration......................................................................................................... 258 PCU.................................................................................................................................. 259 Clock Source .................................................................................................................... 259 Alarm Indication................................................................................................................ 261 PDP .................................................................................................................................. 262

PROVISIONING - IFXS1 MODULE

Viewing iFXS1 Module Information........................................................................................ 265 Configuring Module IP Address ............................................................................................. 266 Configuring MG Interface....................................................................................................... 268 Configuring Call Server .................................................................................................... 268

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring Misc............................................................................................................... 269 Configuring T.38 ............................................................................................................... 270 Configuring QoS .................................................................................................................... 271 Configuring TOS/DSCP.................................................................................................... 271 Configuring VLAN Tag ...................................................................................................... 272 Configuring User Interface ..................................................................................................... 274 Node Configuration........................................................................................................... 274 Port Configuration............................................................................................................. 275 Modifying a FXS Port .................................................................................................. 277 Configuring Ring Definition............................................................................................... 277 Configuring MG Media ........................................................................................................... 279 Configuring VoIP Media.................................................................................................... 279 Configuring Jitter Buffer.................................................................................................... 280 Configuring SIP...................................................................................................................... 282 Configuring SIP Port......................................................................................................... 282 SIP Summary Statistics .................................................................................................... 283 SIP Supported Methods ................................................................................................... 283 SIP Methods Statistics...................................................................................................... 284 Configuring SIP UA................................................................................................................ 285 General Config ................................................................................................................. 285 Server Table ..................................................................................................................... 286 MG Table .......................................................................................................................... 287 User Table ........................................................................................................................ 288

PROVISIONING - IPXDSL MODULE

Node Level Configuration ...................................................................................................... 292 Reset ................................................................................................................................ 292 Module Summary ................................................................................................................... 294 Module Information........................................................................................................... 294 Active Ports ...................................................................................................................... 294 Shelf Level Configuration....................................................................................................... 295 Virtual Board Assignment ................................................................................................. 297 Module Level Configuration ................................................................................................... 298 IPxDSL ............................................................................................................................. 298 Customized Filter.............................................................................................................. 299 Semi-Static Forwarding ............................................................................................... 299 Gateway ARP Filter..................................................................................................... 300 Aging Timer ................................................................................................................. 300 Upstream Multicast Filter ............................................................................................ 300 ARP Tracking .............................................................................................................. 302 NetBIOS Filter ............................................................................................................. 303 DHCP Filter ................................................................................................................. 303 DLF Counter................................................................................................................ 304 IGMP Snooping........................................................................................................... 304 DHCP Option82 .......................................................................................................... 305 Test Timeout ..................................................................................................................... 309 PPPoE Snooping.............................................................................................................. 310

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

10

Port Level Configuration ........................................................................................................ 311 WAN Port.......................................................................................................................... 312 xDSL................................................................................................................................. 313 ADSL Port ................................................................................................................... 314 SHDSL Port ................................................................................................................ 315 Line Status .................................................................................................................. 317 Channel Status............................................................................................................ 320 Previous Status ........................................................................................................... 321 Status Change Time Info............................................................................................. 322 Rate Summary ............................................................................................................ 323 Port Label.................................................................................................................... 324 Bit Loading .................................................................................................................. 325 iSmart.......................................................................................................................... 326 CPE............................................................................................................................. 328 ATM .................................................................................................................................. 330 ATM VC....................................................................................................................... 331 Traffic Profile ............................................................................................................... 332 Bridge ............................................................................................................................... 335 MAC Address Per Port................................................................................................ 335 Packet Policing ........................................................................................................... 337 Packet Policing Setup............................................................................................ 337 IP Address Summary............................................................................................. 339 Forwarding Database.................................................................................................. 339 ARP Table ................................................................................................................... 342 Flood Limit .................................................................................................................. 343 IGMP ................................................................................................................................ 344 Authentication Parameter ........................................................................................... 344 CAC ............................................................................................................................ 345 Multicast Group........................................................................................................... 346 Multicast Host ............................................................................................................. 347 VLAN ................................................................................................................................ 348 VLAN........................................................................................................................... 349 Ingress Rule................................................................................................................ 351 VLAN Untag ................................................................................................................ 353 Access List ....................................................................................................................... 353 QoS .................................................................................................................................. 356 Packet Priority............................................................................................................. 358 Port Based Priority ...................................................................................................... 360 802.1p Tag .................................................................................................................. 362

PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
ICM3 Module ......................................................................................................................... 366 Ethernet PM ..................................................................................................................... 366 General Counters........................................................................................................ 366 Error Counters ............................................................................................................ 368 Traffic Load ................................................................................................................. 370 Bridge PM......................................................................................................................... 371

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

11

Control......................................................................................................................... 371 5 Minutes Report......................................................................................................... 372 15 Minutes Report....................................................................................................... 373 IPADSLx Module .................................................................................................................... 373 ATM PVC.......................................................................................................................... 374 Bridge Port........................................................................................................................ 374 Bridge PM Control....................................................................................................... 375 Bridge.......................................................................................................................... 375 5 Minutes Report......................................................................................................... 377 15 Minutes Report....................................................................................................... 378 WAN Port.......................................................................................................................... 378 Threshold Controls...................................................................................................... 378 15 Minutes................................................................................................................... 379 24 Hours...................................................................................................................... 381 ADSL Port......................................................................................................................... 381 ADSL 15 Minutes Summary........................................................................................ 381 ADSL 24 Hours Summary........................................................................................... 383 Threshold Controls...................................................................................................... 383 ATUC 15 Minutes ........................................................................................................ 384 ATUC 24 Hours ........................................................................................................... 386 ATUR 15 Minutes ........................................................................................................ 386 ATUR 24 Hours ........................................................................................................... 386 Channel Level ............................................................................................................. 386 Downstream 15 Minutes ........................................................................................ 386 Downstream 24 Hours ........................................................................................... 387 Upstream 15 Minutes............................................................................................. 387 Upstream 24 Hours................................................................................................ 387 IPSHDSL3 Module ................................................................................................................. 388

DIAGNOSTICS
F4/F5 Loopback ..................................................................................................................... 391 DELT ...................................................................................................................................... 394 SELT ...................................................................................................................................... 399

10

FAULT MANAGEMENT
Netman 4000 ......................................................................................................................... 406 Audible And Visual Alarm ................................................................................................. 406 Alarm Presentation ........................................................................................................... 406 Alarm Report.......................................................................................................................... 407 Alarm Report .................................................................................................................... 408 Alarm Summary................................................................................................................ 412 Filter Setup ....................................................................................................................... 413 Alarm List ............................................................................................................................... 414 Node Alarm....................................................................................................................... 415 External Alarm .................................................................................................................. 416 ICM3 Alarm....................................................................................................................... 416
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

12

IP-ADSLx Alarm ............................................................................................................... 416 IP-SHDSL3 Alarm ............................................................................................................ 418 iFXS1 Alarm ..................................................................................................................... 419 Event List for iFXS1 Module............................................................................................. 420

11

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
Node File Management ......................................................................................................... 423 Software Upgrade .................................................................................................................. 424 ICM3 Module .................................................................................................................... 424 Upgrade with A Redundant ICM3 Module .................................................................. 425 IPxDSL Modules............................................................................................................... 427 ISM Module ...................................................................................................................... 428 ASM Module..................................................................................................................... 428 File Transfer........................................................................................................................... 428 Download ......................................................................................................................... 431 Upload .............................................................................................................................. 432 Delete ............................................................................................................................... 432 ICM3 Module Backup ............................................................................................................ 432 ICM3 Module Replacement ................................................................................................... 433 Remote Access...................................................................................................................... 435

ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

PPPoE Access Deny Configuration Example ........................................................................ 437 Scenario ........................................................................................................................... 437 Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 437 Solution ............................................................................................................................ 438 Conclusion........................................................................................................................ 443 IP Address Conflict ................................................................................................................ 443 Scenario ........................................................................................................................... 443 Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 443 Solution ............................................................................................................................ 444 Conclusion........................................................................................................................ 449 Deny Specific Subscriber To Access FTP.............................................................................. 449 Scenario ........................................................................................................................... 449 Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 449 Solution ............................................................................................................................ 449 Conclusion........................................................................................................................ 456 Prohibit A Specific Subscriber To Access ABC IM Service .................................................... 456 Scenario ........................................................................................................................... 456 Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 456 Solution ............................................................................................................................ 457 Conclusion........................................................................................................................ 463

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

13

LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52
July 2006

Notice Icon Descriptions......................................................................................... 24 Text Convention Descriptions................................................................................. 24 iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 Documentation Set ...................................................... 25 Configuration - System Log Table .......................................................................... 36 Configuration - RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server - Add Table .............................. 42 RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server - Statistics Table .............................................. 43 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Service Profile Table ................................................. 53 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Spectrum Profile Table .............................................. 56 Line Standard / Line Card Co-relation Table .......................................................... 58 Profile - SHDSL Line Profile - Add Table............................................................... 60 Profile - Ethernet PM Profile Table ......................................................................... 62 Profile - ADSL PM Profile Table ............................................................................. 64 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - From / To Table .............................................. 67 ACL Rule Combination Table ................................................................................. 67 Profile - Packet Priority Classification Table........................................................... 71 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Type Table ...................................... 71 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify Tables .................................... 80 Batch - Create ATM VC Table................................................................................ 83 Batch - Module Configuration Tables .................................................................... 85 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Group Field Description ... 89 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Package Field Description 91 Video Service - Access Control - Account Lockout Policy Field Description .......... 93 Node - System Table............................................................................................ 100 Node - IP Address Table ...................................................................................... 101 Node - ARP Field Description............................................................................... 108 Node - Routing Table Table ................................................................................. 110 Node - Master Shelf Configuration Table ............................................................. 115 Node - Slav Shelves Configuration Table............................................................. 117 Node - Linecard Image File Information Table ..................................................... 119 ICM3/3G - Module Summary Table...................................................................... 126 ICM3/3G Module Placements Details................................................................... 128 ICM3/3G - ICM3/3G Table.................................................................................... 130 ICM3/3G - Forwarding Database Table................................................................ 131 ICM3/3G - Mirror Port Table ................................................................................. 134 ICM3/3G - Trunk Group Table.............................................................................. 136 ICM3/3G - Protection Link Table .......................................................................... 139 ICM3/3G - VBAS Table ........................................................................................ 147 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Internal Ethernet Ports Table ............... 152 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - External Ethernet Ports Table .............. 154 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Trunk Ports Table................................. 157 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Table............................................................................ 159 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Port Table .................................................................... 161 ICM3/3G - VLAN - General Table......................................................................... 166 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Setup Table.................................................................. 168 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Interface - Add Table ................................................... 173 ICM3 - VLAN -Inband VLAN Interface - Add Table .............................................. 175 ICM3/3G - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - General Table ....................................... 178 ICM3/3G - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - Group Membership Table ..................... 180 ICM3/3G - Multicast - IGMP Proxy - General Table ............................................. 181 ICM3 - Routing - Routing Table Field Descriptions .............................................. 189 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - General Table .................................................................. 192 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Redistribution Setup Table............................................... 193
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

14

Table 53 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Neighbor Details Table .....................................................195 Table 54 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Peer Details Table ............................................................196 Table 55 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Key Setup Table ...............................................................197 Table 56 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Interface Setup Table .......................................................199 Table 57 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - General Table ...............................................................202 Table 58 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Route Redistribution Table ...........................................204 Table 59 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Area Setup Table ..........................................................206 Table 60 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Address Ranges Table .................................................208 Table 61 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - LSDB Table...................................................................210 Table 62 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - LSDB Table - LS Type Table ........................................211 Table 63 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Neighbor Details Table .................................................213 Table 64 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Interface Setup Table....................................................215 Table 65 ICM3 - Routing - ARP Field Description ................................................................217 Table 66 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Server Field Description .........................................................220 Table 67 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Profile - Add Table..................................................................223 Table 68 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Masks - Add Field Description.........................238 Table 69 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Actions - Add Field Description .......................241 Table 70 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Meters - Add Field Description ........................243 Table 71 ICM3/3G - QoS - DSCP Mapping..........................................................................252 Table 72 ICM3/3G - QoS - L2 Scheduling - Weight for WRR / SP+WRR ............................254 Table 73 PCU - Module Summary Table .............................................................................257 Table 74 PCU Module Placements Details ..........................................................................258 Table 75 PCU - PCU Table ..................................................................................................259 Table 76 PCU - Clock Source Table ....................................................................................261 Table 77 PCU - Alarm Indication Table ................................................................................262 Table 78 PCU - PDP Table ..................................................................................................263 Table 79 iFXS1 Module Information Window Field Description ...........................................265 Table 80 IP Configuration Window Field Description ...........................................................267 Table 81 Call Server Window Field Description ...................................................................269 Table 82 Misc Configuration Window Field Description .......................................................270 Table 83 T.38 Window Field Descriptio................................................................................271 Table 84 TOS/DSCP Window Field Description ..................................................................272 Table 85 VLAN Tag Window Field Description ...................................................................274 Table 86 Node Configuration Window Field Description ......................................................275 Table 87 Port Configuration Window Field Description ........................................................276 Table 88 Ring Definition Window Field Description .............................................................278 Table 89 VoIP Media Window Field Description .................................................................280 Table 90 Jitter Buffer Window Field Description .................................................................281 Table 91 SIP Port Window Field Description .......................................................................283 Table 92 SIP Supported Method Window Field Description ................................................284 Table 93 General Configuration Window Field Description..................................................286 Table 94 General Configuration Window Field Description..................................................287 Table 95 MG Table Window Field Description ....................................................................288 Table 96 User Table Window Field Description ...................................................................289 Table 97 ICM3 - Module Summary - Module Information Table...........................................294 Table 98 ICM3 - Module Summary - Active Ports Table ......................................................295 Table 99 IPxDSL Module Placements Details......................................................................296 Table 100 IPxDSL - IPxDSL Table.........................................................................................299 Table 101 Format of Circuit ID Sub-option in DHCP Option 82 .............................................305 Table 102 Format of Remote ID Sub-option in DHCP Option 82 ...........................................306 Table 103 IPxDSL - Customized Filter Table .........................................................................307 Table 104 IPxDSL - PPPoE Snooping Table .........................................................................311 Table 105 IPxDSL - ADSL - ADSL Port Table .......................................................................315 Table 106 IPxDSL - SHDSL - SHDSL Port Table ..................................................................316 Table 107 IPxDSL - ADSL - Line Status Table ......................................................................318
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual July 2006

15

Table 108 IPxDSL - SHDSL - Line Status Table ................................................................... 319 Table 109 IPxDSL - ADSL - Channel Status Table ............................................................... 320 Table 110 IPxDSL - ADSL - Status Change Time Info Table................................................ 323 Table 111 IPxDSL - ADSL Rate Summary Table.................................................................. 324 Table 112 IPxDSL - ADSL - CPE Table ................................................................................ 330 Table 113 IPxDSL - ATM - ATM VC Encapsulation Table .................................................... 331 Table 114 IPxDSL - Traffic Profile - Modification Table......................................................... 333 Table 115 IPxDSL - Bridge - MAC Address Per Port Table .................................................. 336 Table 116 IPxDSL - Bridge - Packet Policing - Packet Policing Setup Table........................ 338 Table 117 IPxDSL - Bridge - Packet Policing IP Address Summary Table ........................... 339 Table 118 IPxDSL - Bridge - Forwarding Database Table .................................................... 341 Table 119 IPxDSL - Forwarding Database - Add Table ........................................................ 341 Table 120 IPxDSL - Bridge - ARP Table ............................................................................... 343 Table 121 IPxDSL - IGMP - Multicast Group Table............................................................... 347 Table 122 IPxDSL - IGMP - Multicast Host Table ................................................................. 348 Table 123 IPxDSL- QoS - Recommended User Priority to Traffic Class Mappings .............. 357 Table 124 IPxDSL - QoS - 802.1p Tag Marking on Line Card .............................................. 358 Table 125 IPxDSL - QoS - Port Based Priority - Tag Operation Table.................................. 362 Table 126 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - General Counters Table .................................................... 367 Table 127 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - Error Counters Table ......................................................... 369 Table 128 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - Traffic Load Table.............................................................. 370 Table 129 ICM3 - Bridge PM - Control Table ........................................................................ 371 Table 130 ICM3 - Bridge PM - 5 Minutes Report Table ........................................................ 372 Table 131 IPADSLx - ATM PVC Table.................................................................................. 374 Table 132 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - Bridge PM Control Table ............................................... 375 Table 133 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - Bridge Table .................................................................. 376 Table 134 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - 5 Minutes Report Table ................................................. 377 Table 135 IPADSLx - WAN Port - Thresholds Control Table ................................................ 379 Table 136 IPADSLx - WAN Port - 15 Minutes Table ............................................................. 380 Table 137 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ADSL 15 Minutes Summary Table ................................. 382 Table 138 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - Thresholds Control Table ............................................... 384 Table 139 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ATUC 15 Minutes Table ................................................. 385 Table 140 IPADSLx - Channel - Downstream 15 Minutes Table .......................................... 387 Table 141 IPSHDSL3 - Bridge Table..................................................................................... 388 Table 142 SELT - Test Result Field Description ................................................................... 400 Table 143 Node Alarm Tree Entity ........................................................................................ 407 Table 144 Alarm Report - Subtree......................................................................................... 411 Table 145 Alarm Report - Alarm Class.................................................................................. 412 Table 146 Alarm Report - Alarm Severity.............................................................................. 412 Table 147 Alarm Report - Alarm List Entity ........................................................................... 412 Table 148 Node Alarm List .................................................................................................... 415 Table 149 External Alarm List ............................................................................................... 416 Table 150 ICM3 Alarm List .................................................................................................... 416 Table 151 IP-ADSLx Alarm List............................................................................................. 416 Table 152 IP-SHDSL3 Alarm List .......................................................................................... 418 Table 153 Alarm List of iFXS1 Based on SIP........................................................................ 419 Table 154 Alarm List of RTP Related .................................................................................... 419 Table 155 Alarm List of Uplink FE Interface .......................................................................... 420 Table 156 Event List Based on SIP....................................................................................... 420 Table 157 Basic Event List .................................................................................................... 421 Table 158 Node File Description ........................................................................................... 424

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

16

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Mask Figure 46 Figure 47 Mask Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Invoking Device Manager From Netman 4000 ..................................................... 31 Device Manager Main Window ............................................................................. 32 Configuration - Erase Configuring ........................................................................ 33 Configuration - Erase Shelf Configuring Window ................................................. 34 Configuration - System Log .................................................................................. 36 Configuration - System Log - Add ........................................................................ 37 Configuration - RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server ............................................... 41 Configuration - RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server - Add ...................................... 41 RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server - Statistics ...................................................... 43 Configuration - Telnet Port ................................................................................... 44 Configuration - Maximum Power Setting .............................................................. 44 Configuration - Packet Count Reset ..................................................................... 45 Configuration - Node ID ........................................................................................ 45 Configuration - iSmart Feature ............................................................................. 47 Configuration - LTC Configure ............................................................................. 48 Configuration - LTC Configure - Add .................................................................... 48 Configuration - LTC Configure - Configure - LTC Splitter ..................................... 49 Configuration - LTC Configure - Configure - Test Timeout ................................... 50 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Configuration Template Window ............................. 51 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Configuration Template - Add Window .................... 51 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Service Profile Window ............................................ 52 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Service Profile - Add Window .................................. 52 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Spectrum Profile Window ........................................ 54 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Spectrum Profile - Add Window ............................... 55 Profile - SHDSL Line Profile Window ................................................................... 59 Profile - SHDSL Line Profile - Add Window .......................................................... 60 Profile - Ethernet PM Profile ................................................................................. 62 Profile - Ethernet PM Profile - Add / Modify .......................................................... 63 Profile - ADSL PM Profile ..................................................................................... 64 Profile - ADSL PM Profile - Add / Modify .............................................................. 65 Profile - Access List Profile ................................................................................... 66 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - Any to Any .................................................... 68 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - ARP-Send-IP To ARP-Send-MAC ................ 68 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - Ethernet Type To IP Address ........................ 69 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - MAC Address To Protocol Type ................... 69 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - TCP Port To UDP Port .................................. 70 Profile - Packet Priority Classification Window ..................................................... 70 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - DSCP Window .............................. 72 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - VLAN ID Window .......................... 72 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - IP Protocol Type Window .............. 73 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Send TCP Port .............................. 73 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Send UDP Port ............................. 74 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Receive TCP Port ......................... 74 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Receive UDP Port ......................... 75 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Source IP - IP Address With Subnet 75 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Source IP - IP Address Range ...... 76 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Destination IP - IP Address With Subnet 76 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Destination IP - IP Address Range 77 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Ethernet Type ............................... 77 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - TOS Bits ........................................ 78
July 2006

17

Figure 51 Profile - Traffic Management Profile ..................................................................... 79 Figure 52 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify - Strict Priority ...................... 79 Figure 53 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify - Min/Max with Strict Priority 80 Figure 54 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify - Min/Max with WRR ............ 80 Figure 55 Batch - Create ATM VC Window .......................................................................... 82 Figure 56 Batch - Delete ATM VC Window .......................................................................... 84 Figure 57 Batch - Module Configuration Window ................................................................. 84 Figure 58 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Default Rate .................................. 88 Figure 59 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Group ............................. 89 Figure 60 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Group - Add ................... 90 Figure 61 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Package ......................... 91 Figure 62 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Package - Add ............... 92 Figure 63 Video Service - Access Control - Account Lockout Policy .................................... 93 Figure 64 Video Service - Access Control - Reset Period .................................................... 94 Figure 65 Video Service - Access Control - User Account ................................................... 94 Figure 66 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - User Account - Add ....................... 95 Figure 67 Video Service - Usage Statistics - Call Usage Recognition Time ......................... 96 Figure 68 Video Service - Usage Statistics - Usage Statistics ............................................. 97 Figure 69 Tools - MAC Tracing ............................................................................................. 98 Figure 70 Node - System Window ...................................................................................... 100 Figure 71 Node - IP Address Window ................................................................................ 101 Figure 72 Node - Time Server Window .............................................................................. 103 Figure 73 Node - NMP Access Window ............................................................................. 105 Figure 74 Node - NMP Access - Add SNMP Entry Window ............................................... 106 Figure 75 Node - NMP Access - Add Telnet Entry Window ............................................... 106 Figure 76 Node - ARP Window ........................................................................................... 108 Figure 77 Node - ARP - Add Window ................................................................................. 109 Figure 78 Node - Routing Table Window ............................................................................ 110 Figure 79 Node - Routing Table - Add Window .................................................................. 111 Figure 80 Node - Reset Window ......................................................................................... 113 Figure 81 Node - Master Shelf Configuration Window ....................................................... 115 Figure 82 Node - Slav Shelves Configuration Window ....................................................... 117 Figure 83 Node - Linecard Image File Information Window ............................................... 119 Figure 84 Provisioning - ICM3 Window .............................................................................. 121 Figure 85 Provisioning - ICM3GWindow ............................................................................. 122 Figure 86 ICM3 - Node - Reset Window ............................................................................. 124 Figure 87 ICM3G- Module Summary Window .................................................................... 125 Figure 88 ICM3- Module Summary Window ....................................................................... 126 Figure 89 ICM3 - Shelf View Window ................................................................................. 127 Figure 90 ICM3G - Shelf View Window .............................................................................. 128 Figure 91 ICM3/3G - ICM3 Window .................................................................................... 129 Figure 92 ICM3/3G - Forwarding Database Window .......................................................... 131 Figure 93 ICM3/3G - Forwarding Database - Dynamic Entry Window ............................... 132 Figure 94 ICM3/3G - Forwarding Database - Add Window ................................................ 132 Figure 95 ICM3/3G - Mirror Port Window ........................................................................... 133 Figure 96 ICM3/3G - Trunk Group Window ........................................................................ 135 Figure 97 ICM3/3G - Trunk Group - Add Window .............................................................. 136 Figure 98 ICM3/3G - Trunk Group - Add - Note Window .................................................... 137 Figure 99 ICM3/3G - Protection Link Configuration ............................................................ 138 Figure 100 ICM3/3G - Protection Link ................................................................................. 139 Figure 101 ICM3/3G - Redundancy Support Window ......................................................... 143 Figure 102 ICM3/3G - Switchover Widow ............................................................................ 145 Figure 103 ICM3/3G - VBAS Widow .................................................................................... 147 Figure 104 Standby ICM3/3G - External Ethernet Port Window .......................................... 148 Figure 105 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Internal Ethernet Ports Window ........ 151
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

18

Figure 106 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Internal Ethernet Ports - Modify Window 152 Figure 107 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - External Ethernet Ports Window ....... 153 Figure 108 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - External Ethernet Ports - Modify Window 154 Figure 109 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Trunk Ports Window .......................... 156 Figure 110 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Trunk Ports - Modify Window ............ 157 Figure 111 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Window ..................................................................... 159 Figure 112 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Port Window ............................................................. 161 Figure 113 ICM3/3G - VLAN Frame Forwarding with VLAN - Part 1 .................................. 163 Figure 114 ICM3/3G - VLAN Frame Forwarding with VLAN - Part 2 .................................. 164 Figure 115 ICM3G - VLAN - General Window ..................................................................... 165 Figure 116 ICM3 - VLAN - General Window ....................................................................... 166 Figure 117 ICM3G - VLAN - VLAN Setup Window .............................................................. 167 Figure 118 ICM3 - VLAN - VLAN Setup Window ................................................................ 168 Figure 119 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Setup - Add Window ................................................. 170 Figure 120 ICM3G - VLAN - VLAN Interface Window ......................................................... 171 Figure 121 ICM3 - VLAN - Routed VLAN Interface Window ............................................... 172 Figure 122 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Interface - Add Window ............................................ 172 Figure 123 ICM3 - VLAN - Inband VLAN Interfaces Window .............................................. 174 Figure 124 ICM3 - VLAN - Inband VLAN Interfaces - Add VLAN Interface Window ........... 175 Figure 125 ICM3G- Multicast Window ................................................................................. 176 Figure 126 ICM3 - Multicast Window ................................................................................... 177 Figure 127 ICM3 - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - General Window ...................................... 178 Figure 128 ICM3 - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - Group Membership Window .................... 179 Figure 129 ICM3 - Multicast - IGMP Proxy - General Window ............................................ 180 Figure 130 ICM3 - Multicast - IGMP Proxy - Group Membership ........................................ 181 Figure 131 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - General Window .................................................. 183 Figure 132 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - RP Router Window .............................................. 184 Figure 133 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - RP Router - Add Window ..................................... 184 Figure 134 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - Multicast Routing Table Window .......................... 185 Figure 135 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - Neighbor Details Window ..................................... 186 Figure 136 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - Interface Setup Window ....................................... 187 Figure 137 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - Interface Setup - Add Window ............................. 188 Figure 138 ICM3 - Routing - Routing Table Window ........................................................... 189 Figure 139 ICM3 - Routing - Add ......................................................................................... 190 Figure 140 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - General Window ........................................................... 192 Figure 141 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Redistribution Setup Window ........................................ 193 Figure 142 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Redistribution Setup - Add Window .............................. 194 Figure 143 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Neighbor Details Window ............................................. 194 Figure 144 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Neighbor Details - Add Window .................................... 195 Figure 145 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Peer Details Window .................................................... 196 Figure 146 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Key Setup Window ....................................................... 197 Figure 147 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Key Setup - Add Keychain Window .............................. 198 Figure 148 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Key Setup - Add Key Window ....................................... 198 Figure 149 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Interface Setup Window ................................................ 199 Figure 150 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Interface Setup - Add Window ...................................... 200 Figure 151 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - General Window ....................................................... 202 Figure 152 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Route Redistribution Window .................................... 204 Figure 153 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Route Redistribution- Add Window ............................... 205 Figure 154 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Area Setup Window .................................................. 206 Figure 155 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Area Setup - Add Window ......................................... 207 Figure 156 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Address Ranges Window .......................................... 208 Figure 157 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Address Ranges - Add Window ................................ 209 Figure 158 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - LSDB Table Window ................................................. 210
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual July 2006

19

Figure 159 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Neighbor Details Window .......................................... 213 Figure 160 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Interface Setup Window ............................................ 214 Figure 161 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Interface Setup - Add Window .................................. 215 Figure 162 ICM3 - Routing - ARP Window .......................................................................... 217 Figure 163 ICM3 - Routing - ARP - Add Window ................................................................ 218 Figure 164 ICM3 - Routing - ARP - Delete Advanced Window ........................................... 218 Figure 165 ICM3 - DHCP - Server Window ......................................................................... 220 Figure 166 ICM3 - DHCP - Profile Window ......................................................................... 221 Figure 167 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Profile - Add Window .......................................................... 222 Figure 168 ICM3 - DHCP - Subnet Mapping Window ......................................................... 225 Figure 169 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Subnet Mapping - Add Window .......................................... 226 Figure 170 ICM3 - DHCP - Pool Window ............................................................................ 227 Figure 171 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Pool - Add Window ............................................................. 228 Figure 172 ICM3 - DHCP - Map Window ............................................................................. 229 Figure 173 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Map - Add Window ............................................................. 230 Figure 174 ICM3 - DHCP - Lease Window .......................................................................... 231 Figure 175 ICM3 - DHCP - Option 60 Window .................................................................... 232 Figure 176 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Option 60 - Add Window ..................................................... 232 Figure 177 ICM3 - DHCP - Option 82 Window .................................................................... 233 Figure 178 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Option 82 - Add Window ..................................................... 234 Figure 179 ICM3 - DHCP - VLAN Window .......................................................................... 235 Figure 180 ICM3/3G - DHCP - VLAN - Modify Window ....................................................... 236 Figure 181 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Masks Window .................................................. 237 Figure 182 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Masks - Add Window ................................... 238 Figure 183 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Actions ............................................................... 240 Figure 184 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Actions - Add ............................................... 241 Figure 185 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Meters ............................................................... 242 Figure 186 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Meters - Add ................................................ 243 Figure 187 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Flow Counters ................................................... 244 Figure 188 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Rules ................................................................. 245 Figure 189 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Rules - Add .................................................. 246 Figure 190 ICM3 - QoS - Priority ......................................................................................... 247 Figure 191 ICM3 - QoS - Priority - Modify ........................................................................... 248 Figure 192 ICM3 - QoS - DSCP Priority .............................................................................. 249 Figure 193 ICM3 - QoS - DSCP Priority - Modify ................................................................ 250 Figure 194 ICM3 - QoS - Queue Mapping ........................................................................... 251 Figure 195 ICM3 - QoS - DSCP Mapping - Modify .............................................................. 252 Figure 196 ICM3 - QoS - L2 Scheduling .............................................................................. 253 Figure 197 PCU -Node - Reset ............................................................................................ 256 Figure 198 PCU - Module Summary Window ...................................................................... 257 Figure 199 PCU - Shelf View Window ................................................................................. 258 Figure 200 PCU - PCU Window .......................................................................................... 259 Figure 201 PCU - Clock Source Window ............................................................................. 260 Figure 202 PCU - Alarm Indication Window ........................................................................ 261 Figure 203 PCU - PDP Window ........................................................................................... 263 Figure 204 iFXS1 Module Information ................................................................................. 265 Figure 205 IP Configuration ................................................................................................. 267 Figure 206 Call Server ......................................................................................................... 268 Figure 207 Misc Config ........................................................................................................ 269 Figure 208 T.38 ................................................................................................................... 271 Figure 209 TOS/DSCP ........................................................................................................ 272 Figure 210 VLAN Tag .......................................................................................................... 273 Figure 211 Node Configuration ............................................................................................ 274 Figure 212 Port Configuration .............................................................................................. 276 Figure 213 Ring Definition ................................................................................................... 278
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

20

Figure 214 VoIP Media ........................................................................................................ 280 Figure 215 Jitter Buffer ........................................................................................................ 281 Figure 216 SIP Port ............................................................................................................. 282 Figure 217 SIP Summary Statistics ..................................................................................... 283 Figure 218 SIP Supported Methods .................................................................................... 284 Figure 219 SIP Methods Statistics ...................................................................................... 285 Figure 220 General Config .................................................................................................. 286 Figure 221 Server Table ...................................................................................................... 287 Figure 222 MG Table ........................................................................................................... 288 Figure 223 User Table ......................................................................................................... 289 Figure 224 IPxDSL Provisioning Main Window ................................................................... 291 Figure 225 Node - Reset ..................................................................................................... 293 Figure 226 IPxDSL - Module Summary - Module Information Window ............................... 294 Figure 227 IPxDSL - Module Summary - Active Ports Window ........................................... 295 Figure 228 IPxDSL - Shelf Window ..................................................................................... 296 Figure 229 IPxDSL - Virtual Board Assignment Window ..................................................... 297 Figure 230 IPxDSL - Virtual Board Assignment - Module Type Window ............................. 297 Figure 231 IPxDSL - Virtual Board Deassignment Window ................................................ 298 Figure 232 IPxDSL - IPADSL3A Window ............................................................................ 299 Figure 233 IPxDSL - Customized Filter - Upstream Multicast Filter Packet Flow - Enabled 301 Figure 234 IPxDSL - Customized Filter - Upstream Multicast Filter Packet Flow - Disabled 302 Figure 235 IPxDSL - Customized Filter Window ................................................................. 307 Figure 236 IPxDSL - Test Timeout Window ........................................................................ 310 Figure 237 IPxDSL - PPPoE Snooping Window ................................................................. 311 Figure 238 IPxDSL - WAN - WAN Port Window .................................................................. 313 Figure 239 IPxDSL - ADSL - ADSL Port Window ................................................................ 314 Figure 240 IPxDSL - ADSL - ADSL Port - Assign Profile Window ...................................... 315 Figure 241 IPxDSL - SHDSL - SHDSL Port Window .......................................................... 316 Figure 242 IPxDSL - SHDSL - SHDSL Port - Assign Profile Window ................................. 317 Figure 243 IPxDSL - xDSL - Line Status Window ............................................................... 318 Figure 244 IPxDSL - ADSL - Channel Status Window ........................................................ 320 Figure 245 IPxDSL - ADSL - Previous Status Window ....................................................... 321 Figure 246 IPxDSL - ADSL - Status Change Time Info Window ......................................... 322 Figure 247 IPxDSL - ADSL - Rate Summary Window ......................................................... 323 Figure 248 IPxDSL - xDSL - Port Label Window ................................................................. 324 Figure 249 IPxDSL - xDSL - Port Label - Modify Window ................................................... 325 Figure 250 IPxDSL - ADSL - Bit Loading Window ............................................................... 326 Figure 251 IPxDSL - xDSL - iSmart Window ....................................................................... 328 Figure 252 IPxDSL - ADSL - CPE Window ......................................................................... 329 Figure 253 IPxDSL - ADSL - CPE - Modify Window ........................................................... 330 Figure 254 IPxDSL - ATM - ATM VC Window ..................................................................... 331 Figure 255 IPxDSL - ATM - ATM VC - Add Window ........................................................... 332 Figure 256 IPxDSL - ATM - Traffic Profile Window ............................................................. 334 Figure 257 IPxDSL - ATM - Traffic Profile - Assign Profile Window .................................... 335 Figure 258 IPxDSL - Bridge - MAC Address Per Port Window ........................................... 336 Figure 259 IPxDSL - Bridge - MAC Address Per Port - Modify Window ............................. 337 Figure 260 IPxDSL - Bridge - Packet Policing - Packet Policing Setup Window ................. 338 Figure 261 IPxDSL - Bridge - Packet Policing IP Address Summary Window .................... 339 Figure 262 IPxDSL - Bridge - Forwarding Database Window ............................................. 340 Figure 263 IPxDSL - Forwarding Database - Add Window ................................................. 341 Figure 264 IPxDSL - Bridge - ARP Table Window .............................................................. 343 Figure 265 IPxDSL - Bridge - Flood Limit Window .............................................................. 344 Figure 266 IPxDSL - IGMP - Authentication Parameters Window ...................................... 345 Figure 267 IPxDSL - IGMP - Authentication Parameters - Modify Window ......................... 345 Figure 268 IPxDSL - IGMP - CAC Window ......................................................................... 346
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual July 2006

21

Figure 269 IPxDSL - IGMP - Multicast Group Window ........................................................ 347 Figure 270 IPxDSL - IGMP - Multicast Host Window .......................................................... 348 Figure 271 IPxDSL - VLAN - VLAN Window ....................................................................... 350 Figure 272 IPxDSL - VLAN - VLAN - Add Window .............................................................. 351 Figure 273 IPxDSL - VLAN - Ingress Rule Window ............................................................. 352 Figure 274 IPxDSL - VLAN - Ingress Rule - Modify Window ............................................... 352 Figure 275 IPxDSL - VLAN - VLAN Untag Window ............................................................. 353 Figure 276 IPxDSL - Access List Window ........................................................................... 354 Figure 277 IPxDSL - Access List - Edit Window .................................................................. 355 Figure 278 IPxDSL - Access List - Edit - New Window ....................................................... 356 Figure 279 IPxDSL - QoS - Packet Priority Window ............................................................ 359 Figure 280 IPxDSL - QoS - Packet Priority - Edit Window .................................................. 359 Figure 281 IPxDSL - QoS - Packet Priority - Edit - Add Window ......................................... 360 Figure 282 IPxDSL - QoS - Port Based Priority Window ..................................................... 361 Figure 283 IPxDSL - QoS - Port Based Priority - Modify Window ....................................... 361 Figure 284 IPxDSL - QoS - 802.1p Tag Window ................................................................. 363 Figure 285 Performance Management Main Window ......................................................... 365 Figure 286 ICM3 - Ethernet PM- General Counters ............................................................ 367 Figure 287 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - Error Counters ................................................................ 369 Figure 288 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - Traffic Load ..................................................................... 370 Figure 289 ICM3 - Bridge PM - Control ............................................................................... 371 Figure 290 ICM3 - Bridge PM - 5 Minutes Report ............................................................... 372 Figure 291 IPADSLx - ATM PVC ......................................................................................... 374 Figure 292 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - Bridge PM Control ...................................................... 375 Figure 293 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - Bridge ......................................................................... 376 Figure 294 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - 5 Minutes Report ........................................................ 377 Figure 295 IPADSLx - WAN Port - Thresholds Control ....................................................... 379 Figure 296 IPADSLx - WAN Port - 15 Minutes .................................................................... 380 Figure 297 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ADSL 15 Minutes Summary ........................................ 382 Figure 298 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - Thresholds Control ...................................................... 384 Figure 299 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ATUC 15 Minutes ........................................................ 385 Figure 300 IPADSLx - Channel - Downstream 15 Minutes ................................................. 387 Figure 301 IPSHDSL3 - Bridge ............................................................................................ 388 Figure 302 Diagnostics Main Window ................................................................................. 391 Figure 303 F4/F5 Loopback Window ................................................................................... 393 Figure 304 F4/F5 Loopback - F4 Test Window ................................................................... 393 Figure 305 F4/F5 Loopback - F5 Test Window ................................................................... 394 Figure 306 DELT Window .................................................................................................... 395 Figure 307 DELT - Result - Hlin(f) ....................................................................................... 396 Figure 308 DELT - Result - Hlog(f) ...................................................................................... 396 Figure 309 DELT - Result - QLN(f) ...................................................................................... 397 Figure 310 DELT - Result - SNR(f) ...................................................................................... 397 Figure 311 DELT Window - Result - Report ........................................................................ 398 Figure 312 SELT Window .................................................................................................... 399 Figure 313 SELT - Test Result ............................................................................................ 400 Figure 314 SELT - Test Result - Table ................................................................................ 402 Figure 315 SELT - Test Result - File - Directory .................................................................. 403 Figure 316 SELT - Test Result - View - Inband Noise ......................................................... 403 Figure 317 Platform Level Alarms ....................................................................................... 405 Figure 318 Alarm Tree ......................................................................................................... 407 Figure 319 Fault Management Main Window ...................................................................... 408 Figure 320 Node Alarm ........................................................................................................ 409 Figure 321 Equipment Alarm ............................................................................................... 410 Figure 322 Port Alarm .......................................................................................................... 411 Figure 323 Alarm Summary Window ................................................................................... 413
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

22

Figure 324 Alarm Filter Window .......................................................................................... 414 Figure 325 Software Upgrade ............................................................................................. 425 Figure 326 Tools - TFTP ..................................................................................................... 429 Figure 327 Tools - TFTP - Client Mode ............................................................................... 429 Figure 328 Tools - TFTP Window ........................................................................................ 430 Figure 329 Tools - TFTP Window - Expanded .................................................................... 431 Figure 330 Backup Node ..................................................................................................... 433 Figure 331 Profile Menu - Access List Profiles .................................................................... 438 Figure 332 Access List Profile Summary Window ............................................................... 438 Figure 333 PPPoE Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Deny ..................................... 439 Figure 334 PPPoE Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Permit ................................... 440 Figure 335 PPPoE Access Deny - 2 Profiles Added ........................................................... 440 Figure 336 PPPoE Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Access List ....................................... 441 Figure 337 PPPoE Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Outbound .......... 442 Figure 338 PPPoE Access Deny - Complete ...................................................................... 443 Figure 339 Profile Menu - Access List Profiles .................................................................... 444 Figure 340 Access List Profile Summary Window ............................................................... 444 Figure 341 IP Address Conflict - Add Access List Profile - Permit ...................................... 445 Figure 342 IP Address Conflict - Add Access List Profile - Deny ........................................ 446 Figure 343 IP Address Conflict - 2 Profiles Added .............................................................. 446 Figure 344 IP Address Conflict - IPxDSL Module - Access List .......................................... 447 Figure 345 IP Address Conflict - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Outbound ............. 448 Figure 346 IP Address Conflict - Complete ......................................................................... 449 Figure 347 Profile Menu - Access List Profiles .................................................................... 450 Figure 348 Access List Profile Summary Window ............................................................... 450 Figure 349 FTP Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Deny .......................................... 451 Figure 350 FTP Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Permit ........................................ 452 Figure 351 FTP Access Deny - 2 Profiles Added ................................................................ 452 Figure 352 FTP Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Access List ............................................ 453 Figure 353 FTP Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Inbound ................. 454 Figure 354 FTP Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Outbound ............... 455 Figure 355 FTP Access Deny - Complete ........................................................................... 456 Figure 356 Profile Menu - Access List Profiles .................................................................... 457 Figure 357 Access List Profile Summary Window ............................................................... 457 Figure 358 ABC IM Service Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Deny IP Address Range 458 Figure 359 ABC IM Service Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Deny Specific IP Address 459 Figure 360 ABC IM Service Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Permit ..................... 460 Figure 361 ABC IM Service Access Deny - 3 Profiles Added ............................................. 460 Figure 362 ABC IM Service Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Access List ......................... 461 Figure 363 ABC IM Service Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Outbound .. 462 Figure 364 ABC IM Service Access Deny - Complete ........................................................ 463

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

This chapter contains the order in which tasks should be completed, lists guide conventions and related documentation, and describes how to contact customer service and technical documentation. This guide describes the provisioning procedures for iAN8K B1000 Device Manager and configuration procedures for iAN8K B1000 node and the line modules. Release notes are issued with some productsvisit our website at http://support.utstar.com. If the information in the release notes differs from the information in this guide, follow the instructions in the release notes.

Order of Tasks

To install the iAN8K B1000 product, complete the tasks in the following order: 1 Complete all the procedures in the iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 Installation Manual. 2 Complete all the procedures in the Netman 4000 Installation Manual.

Conventions

This guide may contain notices, figures, screen captures, and certain text conventions.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

24

About This Guide

Notices

Table 1 lists notice icons used in this guide. Table 1 Notice Icon Descriptions
Icon Notice Type Information Note Description Information that contains important features or instructions but is not hazard-related.

Caution or Warning

Cautions are preceded with the word Caution. This type of caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also alert against unsafe practices and potential program, data, system, or device damage. Warnings are preceded with the word Warning. This type of warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Caution or Warning due to potential electrical hazard

Cautions due to potential electrical hazards are preceded with the word Caution. This type of caution indicates a potential electrical hazard. This hazard, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also alert against unsafe practices and potential program, data, system, or device damage. Warnings due to potential electrical hazards are preceded with the word Warning. This type of warning indicates a potential electrical hazard. This hazard, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

ESD

Information that indicates proper grounding precautions are required before handling a product.

Figures and Screen Captures

This guide provides figures and screen captures as examples. These examples contain sample data. This data may vary from the actual data on an installed system. Table 2 lists text conventions in this guide. Table 2 Text Convention Descriptions
Convention Text represented as a screen display Text represented as user entry. Text represented as menu, sub-menu, tab, and field names Description This typeface represents text that appears on a terminal screen, for example login:. user, for example, cd

Text

This typeface represents commands entered by the $HOME.

This typeface represents all menu, sub-menu, tab, and field names within procedures, for example: On the File menu, click New.

Text represented by <variable> This typeface represents a required variable, for example: <filename>

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Related Documentation

25

Related Documentation

The following lists the documentation set for iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 system: Table 3 iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 Documentation Set
Guide Netman 4000 Installation Manual Netman 4000 Operations Manual iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 B1000 Installation Manual iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 B1000 IS Installation Manual iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 Operations Manual iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 Command Line Interface (CLI) User Manual iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 IP Service Module (ISM) Operations Manual iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 IP Service Module (ISM) Command Line Interface (CLI) User Manual iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 ATM Service Module (ASM) Operations Manual iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 ATM Service Module (ASM) Command Line Interface (CLI) User Manual UTSI-NJTC-20050914 UTSI-NJTC-20050870 UTSI-NJTC-20050696 UTSI-NJTC-20050624 UTSI-NJTC-20050697 UTSI-NJTC-20050698 UTSI-NJTC-20050699 UTSI-NJTC-20050700 Part Number

Contacting Customer Service

For information about customer service, including support, training, code releases and updates, contracts, and documentation, visit our website at http://support.utstar.com. Refer to the documentation CD-ROM for information about product warranty. Before contacting technical support, have this information available:

Contract number Problem description

Symptoms Known causes

Product information

Software and hardware versions Serial numbers

Trouble locating and clearing attempts

Contacting Technical Documentation

To provide comments on this documentation, send an e-mail to: techdoc.feedback@utstar.com

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

26

About This Guide

Please include the name and part number of the guide being referenced. If applicable, provide the chapter and page number.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

NETWORK MANAGEMENT

The Netman 4000 system employs advanced object-oriented design with platform-independent Java programming, and is based on TCP/IP, SNMP, UNCP and TL1 protocols. Netman 4000 provides completely unified network management. The Netman 4000 system ultimately enables the network management functions defined in TMN, including configuration, fault, security and log performance management. Its advanced network management functionalities, sophisticated architecture and support for open standards make it well suited for a wide range of networking environments.

System Structure

The Netman 4000 system employs hierarchical system architecture, which accords with the hierarchical nature of the telecommunication network. In this hierarchical network management structure, network management modules on different layers have different functions. The two main layers of Netman 4000 being:

Element Management Layer: Provides operations and management functions for one or more Network Elements (NE) Network Management Layer: Comprises network layer management functions such as monitoring network traffic, network topology and dispatching resources and so on.

Functional Components

Netman 4000 is an overall network management system solution, and has the following functional components:

OMC-A: OMC is located in the EMS layer of the network management system architecture, and comprises IPiAN8K B1000, AN2000, iAN8000, iAN2000, CPE, PWLAN and WLANs Alarm Panel: Is a wall-mountable audio/visual alarm device with a large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). The alarm functions are customized to meet O&M requirements. The panel can be mounted in equipment rooms and works with Netman 4000 to provide audible and visual alarms for broadband networks CLI: Netman 4000 provides a Command Line Interface (CLI) as well as the friendly GUI management access method. An operator can use text commands to configure, monitor and troubleshoot an NE. Refer to CLI user manuals in Related Documentation for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

28

Chapter 1: Network Management

Primary Management Functions

Netman 4000 is a unified entry point for all network-layer functions and integrates system equipment management to achieve the overall management of UTStarcom broadband access products. Netman 4000 supports the following functions: Topology Management The system supports the entire network topology display and the hierarchical physical views within the topology map. The topology map enables users to check network topology via physical location, and to obtain a global view of the entire network from NE data displayed in the network topology. The hierarchical management functionality facilitates convenient NE query and location. In addition, the system supports synchronous zoom in and out of the background and the topology maps, and also facilitates switching between sub-maps. Users can add or delete topology elements (including groups, nodes and links), browse properties of managed objects, and implement specific device management via the device management interface. The system synchronizes the topology data between the server and client, automatically detects the NE and updates its status. The topology map supports real-time alarm display and visual/audio alert. Fault Management The Fault Management module receives the NE traps and categorizes them as alarms/events with alarm indications. Alarm information can be viewed through the UI client to help network managers to obtain real-time fault data, in order to ensure continuous and reliable network service. The system also supports customized alarms/events views; allowing users to modify the events and alarms by configuring alarm suppression or filter settings. Security Management The security management module adopts the Users-Role-Management Domain security management scheme, to ensure the permitted use of network resources, data maintenance integrity and security requirements. Users can create a client account, setup passwords and access domain/privileges using the NMS system management interface. The access privilege prevents unauthorized system access. Access privileges can be narrowly defined to include read/write operations for just one individual managed object. Log Management Netman 4000 initiates a log management at startup. Log records guarantee accurate operations history and convenient system maintenance. The Netman 4000 log management module can be used to create a system log, or a user operation log, and to provide view, filter and backup log functions.

Basic Management Functions

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Primary Management Functions

29

System Tools System provides multiple extended management tools, including Subscriber Management System (SMS), TFTP, node automatic back-up configuration file, SNMP forwarding, CPE management, ADSL Port quality inspection, etc.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

30

Chapter 1: Network Management

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

DEVICE MANAGER

Netman 4000 supports configurations of the node and the plug-in modules through the node device manager. Double-click the node in the tree view panel or the main window to access the device manager. The device manager can also be accessed by right clicking the node and the select the Device Manager as shown in Figure 1. The device manager main window is promoted as shown in Figure 2. Figure 1 Invoking Device Manager From Netman 4000

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

32

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 2 Device Manager Main Window

The Device manager provides the following configuration menus:

Configuration Menu Profile Menu Batch Menu Video Service Menu Tools Menu

Note: Please note the following naming convention for the modules:

IPADSLx is a joint name for all ADSL line cards modules including IPADSL3A, IPADSL3B, IPADSL6A and IPADSL6B IPxDSL is a joint name for all line card modules including IPADSL3A, IPADSL3B, IPADSL6A, IPADSL6B and IPSHDSL3

Note: Please refer to the following manual for more information of Netman 4000 platform configuration:

Netman 4000 Installation Manual Netman 4000 Operations Manual

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

33

Configuration Menu

iAN8K B1000 supports the following options in the Configuration menu:

Get Configuration - To obtain the latest configuration information from Node in real time Save Configuration - To save configuration data into the flash memory of ICM3 module Erase Configuration - To erase configuration data from the flash memory of ICM3 on the master shelf Erase Shelf Configuration - To erase configuration data from the flash of ICM3 on a specific shelf (for shelf stacked node) System Log - To view system log configuration/collector Radius Server - To configure radius server for authentication Telnet Port - To assign the telnet port number Maximum Power Setting - To change the power spectral mask for the modules Packet Count Reset - To change the bridge counters reset behavior Node ID - To assign an unique ID to the node iSmart Feature - To enable / disable iSmart functionality on the line card LTC Configure - To configure LTC setting

Get Configuration

Select Get Configuration from Configuration menu. This command refreshes the iAN8K B1000 node configuration. Select Save Configuration from Configuration menu. This command saves configuration changes made on the Netman 4000 client to the storage memory of iAN8K B1000 node. Select Erase Configuration from Configuration menu. Figure 3 prompts for confirmation. Click Yes to erase configuration data from the flash memory of the ICM3 on the master shelf. Figure 3 Configuration - Erase Configuring

Save Configuration

Erase Configuration

CAUTION: If you reset the system after erasing all configurations the communication via SNMP (Netman) will be disabled. By design the AN-2000
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

34

Chapter 2: Device Manager

IPiAN8K B1000 wont communicate over SNMP with Netman (or any other SNMP Manager) until the Netman IP address has been entered. Youll need to configure one or two Netman IP addresses via CLI command netman-destination found on page 325 of the CLI manual to restore SNMP. There are 2 possible entries here for primary and secondary for the Netman address. It basically maps to the Trap Destination Setup on Netmans Device Manager screen. As long as these addresses are non-zero it will allow SNMP communication. The addresses dont have to point to valid Netman Server addresses. However youll need valid addresses if you expect to receive traps from the node at these locations. Erase Shelf Configuration Select Erase Shelf Configuration from Configuration menu. Figure 4 prompts for shelf selection. Select an shelf ID and click Apply to erase configuration data from the flash memory of the ICM3 module on the selected shelf. Click Close to exit. Note: This feature is applicable to shelf stacked nodes only. Figure 4 Configuration - Erase Shelf Configuring Window

CAUTION: If you reset the system after erasing all configurations the communication via SNMP (Netman) will be disabled. By design the AN-2000 IPiAN8K B1000 wont communicate over SNMP with Netman (or any other SNMP Manager) until the Netman IP address has been entered. Youll need to configure one or two Netman IP addresses via CLI command netman-destination found on page 325 of the CLI manual to restore SNMP. There are 2 possible entries here for primary and secondary for the Netman address. It basically maps to the Trap Destination Setup on Netmans Device Manager screen. As long as these addresses are non-zero it will allow SNMP communication. The addresses dont have to point to valid Netman Server addresses. However youll need valid addresses if you expect to receive traps from the node at these locations. System Log iAN8K B1000 system supports sending system log messages to an external system log collector. The format of system log message conforms to RFC 3164. Netman 4000 displays the syslog and allows user to configure a Syslog server.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

35

Up to five servers can be added to the system. If no Syslog servers are configured or if the IP address is 0.0.0.0, the syslog function is disabled and no messages are sent out. The supported Syslog categories includes:

Login DHCP DSL link up/down DSL line error ICM/LC Ethernet link up/down Configuration change Line module status System alarm Multicast CAC Threshold exceeded ASM ATM link up/down ASM Ethernet link up/down ASM configuration change ASM module status Broadcast video over DSL status Power management status change Shelf stacking status change

Refer to System Log Data for more details of the messages. Select System Log from Configuration menu. Figure 5 prompts for confirmation. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 4 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

36

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 5 Configuration - System Log

Table 4 Configuration - System Log Table

Field ID Description Address Port Description Log ID number A suitable description for the syslog collector The IP address of system log collector UDP Port number for Syslog data Value range: 1-65535 Default: 514 Facility Facility code for each type of event Value range: 16 - 23 Local use 0 - 7 respectively Default: 23 local use 7 Category Categories included in the log

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 5. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 6.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

37

Figure 6 Configuration - System Log - Add

Select an entry in Figure 5 and click Delete to remove an existing entry. Click Close to exit the window. System Log Data iAN8K B1000 generates Syslog messages according the the type of events occur. The description of each types of events are specified in the following sections:

Login
Event User login from console port User logout from console port User failed to login at console port (password authentication fails) Telnet request from IP address a.b.c.d User telnet from IP address a.b.c.d and login to the node User from IP address a.b.c.d logout from telnet session User telnet from IP address a.b.c.d and login to the node failed A received SNMP message has been dropped due to wrong community string or illegitimate source IP address or message parsing error caused by malformed packet. RADIUS message sent to server a.b.c.d timeout RADIUS server is marked as temporary down RADIUS server is recovered from temporary down

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

38

Chapter 2: Device Manager

DHCP
Event A DHCPACK message is snooped in downstream (from WAN port to ADSL ports) DHCP contract expired

No. 1 2

DSL link up/down

Event ADSL/SHDSL port status change

No. 1

DSL line error

Event ADSL line stays in idle or training mode for over five minutes ADSL line goes to unknown state ATU-R /ATU-C capability mismatch

No. 1 2 3

ICM/LC Ethernet link up/down

Event WAN port link goes down (port was administratively enabled) WAN port link comes up (port was administratively enabled and was down) Internal Ethernet link partially down Internal Ethernet link down Internal Ethernet link up External Ethernet link down External Ethernet link up External Ethernet port in trunk down External Ethernet port in trunk up External Ethernet trunk down External Ethernet trunk up

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Configuration change
Event ADSL/SHDSL port admin status change Any other configuration changes Configuration is saved Configurations are erased

No. 1 2 3 4

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

39

Line module status

Event Line card restart Line card restart by management station Line card plug in/out DSL module type mismatch DSL module type mismatch, configured line profile is not supported by physical module, use default profile

No. 1 2 3 4 5

System alarm
Event Fan failure Fuse alarm Fan recover External clock down, while primary clock source is set as external clock, External clock recovery, while primary clock source is set as external clock External clock is no longer configured as primary clock source, while an external clock down alarm is outstanding Fuse recovery

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ASM ATM link up/down

E1 port status change T1 port status change OC3/STM-1 port status change IMA group status change

No. 1 2 3

ASM Ethernet link up/down

Event ASM Ethernet port link goes down (port was administratively enabled) ASM Ethernet port link comes up (port was administratively enabled and was down)

No. 1 2

ASM configuration change

Event E1 port admin status change T1 port admin status change OC3/STM-1 port admin status change Any other configuration changes Configuration is saved Configuration is erased

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

40

Chapter 2: Device Manager

ASM module status

Event ASM card restart ASM card restart by management station ASM card plug in/out

No. 1 2 3

Broadcast video over DSL status

Event CAC threshold exceeded

No. 1

Power management status change

Event Power Management Status change Forced power management state change

No. 1 2

Radius Server

iAN8K B1000 supports a RADIUS client in compliance with IETF RFC 2865 for authentication of CLI login through Telnet or console port. When the feature is enabled and the user ID fails the local authentication, the login information is sent to the Radius server for authentication. if the user is configured locally and the local authentication fails, the information is not sent to RADIUS. User shall not configure local user and RADIUS user with the same user ID. Select Radius Server from Configuration menu. Radius server supports the following configuration:

RADIUS Server Statistics

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

41

RADIUS Server Select Radius Server from Configuration menu. The radius server window is displayed as shown in Figure 7. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest statistics. Figure 7 Configuration - RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server

Select Disable or Enabled and click Apply in Figure 7 to disable/enable the RADIUS authentication. By default, this feature is disabled. Click Add in Figure 7 to create a new entry. Figure 8 prompts for radius server information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to add the entry. Maximum of 4 radius server entries can be configured. Refer to Table 5 for more information of the parameters. Figure 8 Configuration - RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server - Add

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

42

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Table 5 Configuration - RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server - Add Table

Parameter IP Address Port Value Range IP Address of the Radius server. UDP port number. Value range: 1 - 65535. Default: 1812 Server Name Secret Priority A unique character string with maximum of 32 characters A unique character string with maximum of 32 characters Priority of the server. Value range: 1-4 Recovery time The waiting time before the server to become active again after the server does not respond and the system has to switch to the next server for 2 consecutive times. Value range: 1 - 3600 seconds Default: 300 Retries The number of retries when no response received from a server before proceeding to the next server with the highest priority. Value range: 0-10 Default:3 Timeout The time to wait for response from a server before proceeding to the next available server with the highest priority. Value range: 1-30 seconds Default: 5 seconds

Select an entry in Figure 7 and click Delete to remove the entry. Click Close in Figure 7 to exit the window. Statistics Select Radius Server from Configuration menu and select the Statistics tab to open Figure 9. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest statistics. Refer to Table 6 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

43

Figure 9 RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server - Statistics

Table 6 RADIUS Server - RADIUS Server - Statistics Table

Parameter Unknown Authentication Reply IP Address Port Priority Server Name Server State Value Range The counter for the number of Unknown Authentication Value range: 32-bit counter IP address of the server Port number of the server Priority setting of the server Name of the server Active Temporary down: the server does not respond and the system has to switch to the next server for 2 consecutive times. The sever then becomes temporary down until the Recovery Time is passed. The counter for the number of server goes down. Value range: 32-bit counter Requests The counter for the number of Access Requests. Value range: 32-bit counter Accepts The counter for the number of Access Accepts. Value range: 32-bit counter Rejects The counter for the number of Access Rejects. Value range: 32-bit counter Timeouts The counter for the number of Access Timeouts. Value range: 32-bit counter Retransmits The counter for the number of Access Retries. Value range: 32-bit counter

Down Times

Telnet Port

iAN8K B1000 supports telnet access to the ICM3 module and the telnet port number is configurable with valid range of 23 and 1025 to 65535. The default
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

44

Chapter 2: Device Manager

value is 23. The iAN8K B1000 system allows user to remotely access the CLI interface of the IPxDSL line modules via ICM3. The CLI access is protected by password. Changing the telnet port number disconnects all active telnet sessions. The new port number comes into effect for the new telnet sessions. Select Telnet Port from Configuration menu to open the telnet port setup window shown in Figure 10. Configure the parameter and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Click Close to exit the window. Figure 10 Configuration - Telnet Port

Maximum Power Setting

This command allows reduction of the power spectral mask for IPADSL module by 1db. Select Maximum Power Setting from Configuration menu to open the maximum power setting window shown in Figure 11. Configure the parameter and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Click Close to exit the window. Figure 11 Configuration - Maximum Power Setting

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

45

Packet Count Reset

This command changes the bridge counters reset behavior and ATM PVC counters based on the administrative state of the port.

When disabled, all counters are not reset when the corresponding xDSL line becomes administratively locked. When enabled, all counters are reset when the corresponding xDSL line becomes administratively locked.

Select Packet Count Reset from Configuration menu to open the packet count reset window shown in Figure 12. Configure the parameter and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Click Close to exit the window. Figure 12 Configuration - Packet Count Reset

Node ID

This command provides node ID assignment. Please refer to the Netman 4000 Operations Manual for more details of inventory management. Select Node ID from Configuration menu to open the node ID window shown in Figure 13. Configure the parameter and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Click Close to exit the window. Note: Node ID modification does not take effect until ICM3 module is reset. Figure 13 Configuration - Node ID

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

46

Chapter 2: Device Manager

iSmart Feature

iSmart addresses home-port identity issue for PAP-based PPPoE sessions. Home-port refers to the DSL port from which the PPPoE session is originated. In many instances, this information is required by B-RAS (the PPPoE server) to implement features like account binding (bind username-password to particular DSL port). iSmart inserts the home port identity to PAP authentication packet, therefore relays the information to PPPoE server. When iSmart is enabled, user can configure the user name option for each DSL port to:

Replacement PPPoE PAP Authenticate-Request message (RFC 1134) received from the DSL port is modified to: Replace the peer-ID field with node_id#shelf_id#slot_id#port_id. The node_id is an integer from 1 to 9999 and it is provisioned by the user in Node ID section. The shelf_id is an integer indexed from 1. The slot_id is an integer indexed from 1 and slot B is indexed as 17. The port_id is an integer indexed from 1.

Extension PPPoE PAP Authenticate-Request message (RFC 1134) received from the DSL port is modified to: Replace the peer-ID field with node_id#shelf_id#slot_id#port_id#old_ peer_id. The node_id is an integer from 1 to 9999 and it is provisioned by the user in Node ID section. The shelf_id is an integer indexed from 1. The slot_id is an integer indexed from 1 and slot B is indexed as 17. The port_id is an integer indexed from 1. The old_peer_id is the peer ID field in the original received packet.

No modification PPPoE PAP Authenticate-Request message (RFC 1134) received from the DSL port is not modified.

Note: Refer to Chapter 7- iSmart for more information of iSmart configuration. Select iSmart Feature from Configuration menu to open the iSmart feature window shown in Figure 14. Select the shelf ID to display the corresponding slot configuration. Select the port and click Enable/Disable to enable/disable iSmart on the selected port. Click Close to exit the window.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

47

Figure 14 Configuration - iSmart Feature

LTC Configure

Select LTC Configure from Configuration menu to open the LTC configure window shown in Figure 15. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

48

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 15 Configuration - LTC Configure

Click Add in Figure 15 to create a new entry. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 16. Figure 16 Configuration - LTC Configure - Add

Select an entry in Figure 15 and click Delete to remove an existing entry. Select an entry in Figure 15 and click Configure to open Figure 17. Select the slot and and click test-in, test-out or un-test in Figure 17.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuration Menu

49

Figure 17 Configuration - LTC Configure - Configure - LTC Splitter

Select the Test Timeout tab in Figure 17 to open Figure 18. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameter and click Apply take the modification into effect. Click Close to exit the window.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

50

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 18 Configuration - LTC Configure - Configure - Test Timeout

Profile Menu

iAN8K B1000 supports the following options for profile configuration:

ADSL Line Profile - to configure ADSL line profile SHDSL Line Profile - to configure SHDSL line profile Ethernet PM Profile - to configure Ethernet performance profile ADSL PM Profile - to configure ADSL performance profile Access List Profile - to configure access list profile Packet Priority Classification - to configure packet priority classification rules Traffic Management Profile - to configure traffic management profile

ADSL Line Profile

This feature allows ADSL line profile template configuration. Maximum of 64 templates, 64 service profiles and 64 spectrum profiles can be configured for each node.

Configuration Template Service Profile Spectrum Profile

ADSL templates can not be modified/deleted if it is assigned to any ADSL port. Service profiles and spectrum profiles can not be modified/deleted if it is is associated with any ADSL templates. Note: Refer to Chapter 7 for more information of ADSL line profile assignment on IPADSL modules. Configuration Template Select ADSL Line Profile from Profile menu to open Figure 19. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

51

Figure 19 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Configuration Template Window

Click Add or select a profile and click Modify to open Figure 20. Select the pre-configured service profile and spectrum profile. Click Apply to confirm the modification. Figure 20 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Configuration Template - Add Window

Note: Templates can not be modified/deleted if it is assigned to any ADSL port. Service Profile This feature allows configuration of downstream/upstream rate and L2 rates. Select ADSL Line Profile from Profile menu. Click Service Profile tab to open Figure 21. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

52

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 21 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Service Profile Window

Dissociate the service profile with any ADSL profile templates before attempting to modify/delete the profile. Click Add or select a profile and click Modify to open Figure 22. Configure the parameters and click Apply to confirm. Refer to Table 7 for more details. Figure 22 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Service Profile - Add Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

53

Table 7 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Service Profile Table

Field Service Profile Downstream Min Rate Description A character string up to 32 characters Value range: 32 - 32736 Kbps in step of 4 with line standard 1 or 2, otherwise in step of 32 Default: 32 Kbps Downstream Max Rate Value range: 32 - 32736 Kbps in step of 4 with line standard 1 or 2, otherwise in step of 32 Default: 8064 Kbps Downstream Interleave Delay Value range: 1-63 ms Default: 8 ms Upstream Min Rate Value range: 32 - 1536 Kbps in step of 4 with line standard 1 or 2, otherwise in step of 32 Default: 32 Kbps Upstream Max Rate Value range: 32 - 1536 Kbps in step of 4 with line standard 1 or 2, otherwise in step of 32 Default: 864 Kbps Upstream Interleave Delay Value range: 1-16 ms Default: 8 ms L2 Entry Rate This parameter specifies the downstream data rate threshold that triggers entry into L2 power state. L2 entry rate must be less than L2 exit rate Value range: 0- 1024 kbps Default: 64 Kbps Min L2 Data Rate This parameter specifies the minimum data rate during L2 power state. L2 data rate must be greater then L2 exit rate Value range: 256 - 1024 kbps Default: 256 Kbps L2 Exit Rate This parameter specifies the downstream data rate that triggers the exit from L2 power state. L2 exit rate must be less than L2 data rate Value range: 0- 1024 kbps Default: 128 Kbps

Spectrum Profile This feature allows configuration of line standards, transmission mode, SNR margin, etc. Select ADSL Line Profile from Profile menu. Click Spectrum Profile tab to open Figure 23. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

54

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 23 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Spectrum Profile Window

Dissociate the spectrum profile with any ADSL profile templates before attempting to modify/delete the profile. Click Add or select a profile and click Modify to open Figure 24. Configure the parameters and click Apply to confirm. Refer to Table 8 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

55

Figure 24 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Spectrum Profile - Add Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

56

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Table 8 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Spectrum Profile Table

Field Spectrum Profile Line Standard Description A character string up to 32 characters

ADSL2/ReADSL2/G.DMT Annex A Automode ADSL2plus/ADSL2/ReADSL2/G.DMT Annex A Automode ADSL2plus/ADSL2/G.DMT Annex B Automode ADSL2/G.DMT Annex B Automode G.dmt Annex A G.dmt Annex B Annex A multimode T1.413 G.lite Annex A

Refer to Table 9 for the specific standards supported by each linecards. Transmission mode Value range: Echo Cancellation / FDM Default: FDM Tx Power Attenuation Value range: 0-40 dB in increment of 1dB Default: 0 dB ATM Header Compression Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Disable Rate Mode Value range: Fixed / Adaptive at Startup / Adaptive at Runtime Default: Adaptive at Runtime Spectrum Mask Value range: No Mask / RFI Mask Default: No Mask Downstream Target Downstream SNR Margin Value range: 0 ~ 31 dB Default: 6 dB Min Downstream SNR Margin Must be at least 3 dB lower than target downstream SNR margin. Value range: 0 ~ 31 dB Default: 0 dB Downstream Upshift SNR Margin Only applicable with adaptive rate mode at run time. Must be at least 1 dB higher than target downstream SNR margin. Value range: 0 ~ 31 dB Default: 9 dB Downstream Downshift SNR Margin Only applicable with adaptive rate mode at run time. Must be at least 1 dB lower than target downstream SNR margin. Value range: 0 ~ 31 dB Default: 3 dB

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

57

Table 8 Profile - ADSL Line Profile - Spectrum Profile Table

Field Max Downstream SNR Margin Description Must be at least 3 dB higher than target downstream SNR margin. Value range: 0 ~ 31 dB Default: 31 dB Downstream Bit Swapping Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Enable Downstream minimum Upshift Time Only applicable with adaptive rate mode at run time. Value range: 1 ~ 16383 s Default: 60 s Downstream minimum Downshift Only applicable with adaptive rate mode at run time. Time Value range: 1 ~ 16383 s Default: 60 s Upstream Target Upstream SNR Margin Value range: 0 ~ 31 dB Default: 6 dB Min Upstream SNR Margin Must be at least 3 dB lower than target upstream SNR margin. Value range: 0 ~ 31 dB Default: 0 dB Max Upstream SNR Margin Must be at least 3 dB higher than target upstream SNR margin. Value range: 0 ~ 31 dB Default: 31 dB Upstream Bit Swapping Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Enable Power Management State Value range: Disabled / L3 only/ L2 only / L3 and L2 Default: None Min Time Between An Exit and the Next Entry Not applicable when L2 state is disabled. The minimum time between an exit from L2 state and the next entry into the L2 state. Value range: 120 ~ 255 s Default: 180 s Min L2 Entry Time Not applicable when L2 state is disabled. Value range: 900 ~ 65535 s Default: 900 s

The line standard, Annex type, downstream spectrum and upstream spectrum are interdependent and each one changes as per the modification carried out in

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

58

Chapter 2: Device Manager

the other. Table 9 lists the correlation and interdependencies between the line card and relevant line standards Table 9 Line Standard / Line Card Co-relation Table
Line standard ADSL2/ReADSL2/G.DMT Annex A Automode ADSL2plus/ADSL2/ReADSL2/G.DMT Annex A Automode ADSL2plus/ADSL2/G.DMT Annex B Automode ADSL2/G.DMT Annex B Automode G.dmt Annex A G.dmt Annex B Annex A multimode T1.413 G.lite Annex A V V V V V IPADSL3A/6A V V V V IPADSL3B/6B

SHDSL Line Profile

This command allows SHDSL line profile configuration. Maximum of 64 SHDSL profile templates can be created for each node. Select SHDSL Line Profile from Profile menu to open Figure 25. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Note: Refer to Chapter 7 for more information of SHDSL line profile assignment on IPSHDSL3 modules.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

59

Figure 25 Profile - SHDSL Line Profile Window

Click Add or select a profile and click Modify in Figure 25. Configure the parameters in Figure 26 and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Refer to Table 10 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

60

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 26 Profile - SHDSL Line Profile - Add Window

Table 10 Profile - SHDSL Line Profile - Add Table

Parameter Profile Name Transmission Mode Value Range A character string up to 32 characters Value range: Annex A / Annex B Default: Annex A Min Rate Applicable with adaptive rate mode. Value range:

For 2-wire, 200 to 2312 Kbps in increments of 64 Kbps For 4-wire, 400 to 4624 Kbps in increments of 128 Kbps

Default:

200 Kbps for 2-wire 400 Kbps for 4-wire

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

61

Table 10 Profile - SHDSL Line Profile - Add Table

Parameter Max Rate Value Range Applicable with adaptive rate mode. Value range:

For 2-wire, 200 to 2312 Kbps in increments of 64 Kbps For 4-wire, 400 to 4624 Kbps in increments of 128 Kbps

Default:

2312 Kbps for 2-wire 4264 Kbps for 4-wire

Fixed Rate

Applicable with fixed rate mode. Value range:

For 2-wire, 200 to 2312 Kbps in increments of 64 Kbps For 4-wire, 400 to 4624 Kbps in increments of 128 Kbps

Default:

200 Kbps for 2-wire 400 Kbps for 4-wire

Rate Mode

Value range: Adaptive Rate / Fixed Rate Default: Adaptive Rate

Downstream Current Condition Value range: -10 to 20 dB Target SNR Margin Default: 0 dB Downstream Worst Condition Target SNR Margin Upstream Current Condition Target SNR Margin Upstream Worst Condition Target SNR Margin Wire interface Value range: -10 to 20 dB Default: 0 dB Value range: -10 to 20 dB Default: 0 dB Value range: -10 to 20 dB Default: 0 dB Value range: Two Wire / Four Wire Default: Two Wire

Select a profile in Figure 25 and click Delete to delete the profile. Click Close in Figure 25 to exit. Ethernet PM Profile This command allows configuration of performance thresholds for Ethernet traffic. The system supports two time durations for the profile, 15 minutes and 24 hours. Select Ethernet PM Profile from Profile menu to open Figure 27. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 11 for more details. Note: Refer to Chapter 7 for more information of performance profile assignment.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

62

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 27 Profile - Ethernet PM Profile

Table 11 Profile - Ethernet PM Profile Table

Field 15 Minutes Description The error threshold for the past 15 minutes interval. Value range: 0-900 24 Hours The error threshold for the past 24 hours interval. Value range: 86400. Alignment Error CRC Error Oversized Frame Collision The number of alignment errors permitted in a period of time The number of cyclical redundancy check error permitted in a period of time The number of oversized frames permitted in a period of time The number of collision permitted in a period of time

Click Add or select a profile and click Modify in Figure 27 to configure profiles in Figure 28. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

63

Figure 28 Profile - Ethernet PM Profile - Add / Modify

Select a profile in Figure 27 and click Delete to delete the profile. Click Close in Figure 27 to exit. ADSL PM Profile This command allows configuration on performance thresholds for ADSL traffic. The system supports two time durations, 15 minutes and 24 hours. Select ADSL PM Profile from Profile menu to open Figure 29. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 12 for more details. Note: Refer to Chapter 7 for more information of performance profile assignment.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

64

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 29 Profile - ADSL PM Profile

Table 12 Profile - ADSL PM Profile Table

Field 15 Min 24 Hr LOF LOS LOL LPR ES SES UAS Description The number of errors permitted in 15 minutes interval The number of errors permitted in 24 hours interval The number of frame lost The number of signal lost The number of link lost The number of power lost The number of errored seconds The number of severely errored seconds The number of unavailable seconds

Click Add or select a profile and click Modify in Figure 29 to configure profiles in Figure 30. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

65

Figure 30 Profile - ADSL PM Profile - Add / Modify

Select a profile in Figure 29 and click Delete to delete the profile. Click Close in Figure 29 to exit. Access List Profile The iAN8K B1000 system allows user to configure access list profile on the node level, and apply the access list to the inbound or outbound of one or more bridge ports on IPxDSL modules including the WAN ports. Up to ten access lists are allowed on each bridge port and up to 512 access-lists are allowed on the node. If access list is configured on inbound traffic of the bridge port, the IPxDSL module examines the incoming packet against the access-list in the order it is configured. When the first matched access-list is found, the IPxDSL module permits/denies the packet based on the Action field of the access-list. After a match is found, the IPxDSL module does not continue to examine the remaining

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

66

Chapter 2: Device Manager

access-list. If no match is found, the packet is discarded. If no access list is configured on inbound of the bridge port, the incoming packet is permitted. If access list is configured on outbound traffic of the bridge port, the IPxDSL module examines the outgoing packet against the access-list in the order it is configured. When the first matched access-list is found, the IPxDSL module permits/denies the packet based on the Action field of the access-list. After a match is found, the IPxDSL module does not continue to examine the remaining access-list. If no match is found, the packet is discarded. If no access list is configured on outbound of the bridge port, the outgoing packet is permitted. Only subscriber traffic is subject to ACL rule. In-band management traffic (in VLAN 4093 and 4094) is not subject to ACL filtering. If upgrading from an old release, where a rule with invalid combination is created, such rule is inherited as it is. (Its users choice to delete or keep these invalid rules) Select Access List Profile from Profile menu to open Figure 31. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Note: Refer to Chapter 7 for more information of access list profile assignment. Figure 31 Profile - Access List Profile

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

67

Click Add in Figure 31 to configure profiles. Table 13 lists the variation of the From and To fields and the applicable parameters. Table 13 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - From / To Table
Field Any - Figure 32 ARP-Send-IP - Figure 33 ARP-Send-MAC - Figure 33 Ethernet Type - Figure 34 IP Address - Figure 34 Description Any sources/destination Value range: IP address with network mask or with a range Value range: MAC address Value range: Two bytes, hex value IP address with network mask or with a range Value range: Valid IP address MAC Address - Figure 35 Protocol Type - Figure 35 TCP Port - Figure 36 Value range: Valid MAC address Value range: One byte, a decimal value Port number and range. Starting from x, and for y consecutive numbers x: 1 to 65535 y: greater or equal to x, less or equal to 65535 UDP Port - Figure 36 Port number and range. Starting from x, and for y consecutive numbers x: 1 to 65535 y: greater or equal to x, less or equal to 65535

Table 14 lists the valid ACL rule combination supported on the system. Table 14 ACL Rule Combination Table
From Any Any MAC Ether Type Arp IP To Arp Mac IP Prot Type TCP Port UDP Port V V V V V V V V V MAC V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V EtherType V V Arp IP V V Arp Mac V V IP V V Prot Type V V TCP Port V V UDP Port V V

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

68

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 32 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - Any to Any

Figure 33 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - ARP-Send-IP To ARP-Send-MAC

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

69

Figure 34 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - Ethernet Type To IP Address

Figure 35 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - MAC Address To Protocol Type

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

70

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 36 Profile - Access List Profile - Add - TCP Port To UDP Port

Select a profile in Figure 31 and click Delete to delete the profile. Click Close in Figure 31 to exit. Packet Priority Classification Select Packet Priority Classification from Profile menu to open Figure 37. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 15 for more information Figure 37 Profile - Packet Priority Classification Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

71

. Table 15 Profile - Packet Priority Classification Table

Field Index Description An unique index for the rule Value range: 1-65535 Name An unique name of the rule Value range: maximum 32 characters Priority Value range: 0 - 7 Default: 1 Type IP Protocol Type Classification type. Refer to Table 16. Values of the classification type. Refer to Table 16.

Click Add in Figure 37 to create a new profile. Table 16 lists the variation of the Type fields and the applicable parameters. Table 16 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Type Table
Field DSCP - Figure 38 VLAN ID - Figure 39 IP Protocol Type - Figure 40 Send TCP Port - Figure 41 Description Value range: 0 - 63, or 6 digits binary format Value range: 1 - 4094 Value range: 0 - 255 Port number and range. Starting from x, and for y consecutive numbers x: 1-65535 y: 1 to 65536-x Send UDP Port - Figure 42 Port number and range. Starting from x, and for y consecutive numbers x: 1-65535 y: 1 to 65536-x Receive TCP Port - Figure 43 Port number and range. Starting from x, and for y consecutive numbers x: 1-65535 y: 1 to 65536-x Receive UDP Port - Figure 44 Port number and range. Starting from x, and for y consecutive numbers x: 1-65535 y: 1 to 65536-x Source IP - Figure 45 & Figure 46 Destination IP - Figure 47 & Figure 48 Ethernet Type - Figure 49 TOS Bits - Figure 50 Value range: IP address with subnet mask or with a range Value range: IP address with subnet mask or with a range Value range: Heximal value, two bytes Value range: 0 - 15, or 4 digits binary format

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

72

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 38 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - DSCP Window

Figure 39 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - VLAN ID Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

73

Figure 40 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - IP Protocol Type Window

Figure 41 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Send TCP Port

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

74

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 42 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Send UDP Port

Figure 43 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Receive TCP Port

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

75

Figure 44 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Receive UDP Port

Figure 45 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Source IP - IP Address With Subnet Mask

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

76

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 46 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Source IP - IP Address Range

Figure 47 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Destination IP - IP Address With Subnet Mask

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

77

Figure 48 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Destination IP - IP Address Range

Figure 49 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - Ethernet Type

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

78

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 50 Profile - Packet Priority Classification - Add - TOS Bits

Select a profile in Figure 37 and click Delete to delete the profile. Click Close in Figure 37 to exit. Traffic Management Profile Netman 4000 supports 64 DSL port traffic profile templates and a single linecard supports maximum of 8 profiles (including the default profile) at the same time. Select Traffic Management Profile from Profile menu to open Figure 51. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Note: Refer to Chapter 7 for more information of traffic profile assignment.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Profile Menu

79

Figure 51 Profile - Traffic Management Profile

Click Add or select a profile and click Modify in Figure 51 to configure profiles in Figure 52. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Figure 52 displays the configuration options for Strict Priority scheduler. Figure 53 displays the configuration options for Min/Max with Strict Priority scheduler. Figure 54 displays the configuration options for Min/Max with WRR scheduler. Refer to Table 17 for more details. Figure 52 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify - Strict Priority

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

80

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 53 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify - Min/Max with Strict Priority

Figure 54 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify - Min/Max with WRR

Table 17 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify Tables

Parameter Profile name Scheduler Value Range Character string up to 32 characters Strict Priority, Min-Max with strict priority, Min-Max with WRR Default: Strict priority Minimum egress rate for Traffic Class 0 (kbps) Minimum egress rate for Traffic Class 1 (kbps)
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Notes

0 - to any 32-bit value 0 - to any 32-bit value

Note1 Note1

July 2006

Batch Menu

81

Table 17 Profile - Traffic Management Profile - Add / Modify Tables

Parameter Minimum egress rate for Traffic Class 2 (kbps) Minimum egress rate for Traffic Class 3 (kbps) Maximum egress rate limit for Traffic Class 0 (kbps) Maximum egress rate limit for Traffic Class 1 (kbps) Maximum egress rate limit for Traffic Class 2 (kbps) Maximum egress rate limit for Traffic Class 3 (kbps) Excessive bandwidth sharing weight for Traffic class 0 Value Range 0 - to any 32-bit value 0 - to any 32-bit value 0 - to any 32-bit value 0 - to any 32-bit value 0 - to any 32-bit value 0 - to any 32-bit value 1%-100% in step of 1% Default: 25% Excessive bandwidth sharing weight for Traffic class 1 1%-100% in step of 1% Default: 25% Excessive bandwidth sharing weight for Traffic class 2 1%-100% in step of 1% Default: 25% Excessive bandwidth sharing weight for Traffic class 3 1%-100% in step of 1% Default: 25% Note3 Note3 Note3 Notes Note1 Note1 Note1 & Note2 Note1 & Note2 Note1 & Note2 Note1 & Note2 Note3

Note: Please note the following for traffic management profile: 1 N/A if scheduler is configured as Strict Priority. For Min-Max with strict priority and Min-Max WRR this field must be provisioned. 2 0 means no limit. Maximum egress rate has to be either 0 or larger than the minimum egress rate configured at same traffic class 3 Valid only if scheduler is configured as Min-max with WRR. The total weight from four traffic class shall equal to 100%. Columbia limitation calls for sharing weight to start from 1%, instead of 0%. Select a profile in Figure 51 and click Delete to delete the profile. Click Close to exit.

Batch Menu

To expedite configuration procedures, Netman 4000 offers batch configuration option. This allows creation of ATM VC and configuration on multiple IPxDSL modules in the system. iAN8K B1000 supports the following options for batch configuration

Create ATM VC - Bulk automated creation of ATM VC's on multiple IPxDSL Modules Delete ATM VC - Bulk deletion of ATM VC's on multiple IPxDSL Modules Module Configuration - Bulk configuration of multiple IPxDSL Modules

Create ATM VC

This feature allows creating ATM VC's on multiple IPxDSL modules at once.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

82

Chapter 2: Device Manager

When CPE management is disabled, the IPxDSL module supports a pool of 192 PVC and each port supports maximum of 8 PVC. When CPE management is enabled, the IPxDSL module supports a pool of 168 PVC and each port supports maximum of 7 PVC. Note: In case that the configuration is not allowed on one or more ADSL ports of a module (e.g. an ATM VC already exists), Netman 4000 skips the entire configuration on the corresponding module, (e.g. no ATM VC is added on any ADSL port for that module) and continues with the rest of the modules. Note: The Netman 4000 reports to the user, module by module the outcome of the batch configuration. The information conveyed is:

Configuration completed No ATM VC is added. Configuration is rejected due to sanity check Node response timeout. The operation might not be executed or only partially executed at the module

Select Create ATM VC from Batch menu to open Figure 55. Select the module type and all the installed modules of the type are displayed. User can modify the module individually or click Select All to select all modules. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Click Close in Figure 55 to exit the batch configuration window. Refer to Table 18 for more details. Figure 55 Batch - Create ATM VC Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Batch Menu

83

Table 18 Batch - Create ATM VC Table

Field VPI Description Value range: 0 - 255 Default: 0 VCI Value range: 32 - 65535 Default: 35 CoS Value range: UBR Read only Connection Type Value range: PVC Read only Multiplexing Method Value range:

Bridged PDU over RFC2684 with LLC Multiplexing Bridged PDU over RFC2684 with VC Multiplexing VC Multiplexing for PPPoA (convert to PPPoE) LLC Multiplexing for PPPoA (convert to PPPoE) Auto Detection, PPPoA to PPPoE conversion enabled Auto Detection, PPPoA to PPPoE conversion disabled

Default: Bridged PDU over RFC2684 with LLC Multiplexing

Delete ATM VC

This feature allows deleting ATM VC's on multiple IPxDSL Modules at once. Note: In case that the delete configuration is not allowed on one or more xDSL ports of a module (e.g. the xDSL port is unlocked), Netman 4000 skips the entire configuration on the corresponding module, (e.g. no ATM VC is removed from the corresponding module) and continues with the rest of the modules. Note: The Netman 4000 reports to the user, module by module the outcome of the batch configuration. The information conveyed is:

Configuration completed No ATM VC is removed. Configuration is rejected due to sanity check Node response timeout. The operation might not be executed or only partially executed at the module

Select Delete ATM VC from Batch menu to open Figure 56. Select the modules or click Select All to select all modules. Click Apply to delete the selected modules. Click Close in Figure 56 to exit the batch configuration window.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

84

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 56 Batch - Delete ATM VC Window

Module Configuration

This feature allows users to configure multiple IPxDSL modules simultaneously. Select Module Configuration from Batch menu to open Figure 57. Select the module type from the drop-down box to display all the matching modules in the node. Refer to Table 19 for more details. Figure 57 Batch - Module Configuration Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Batch Menu

85

Table 19 Batch - Module Configuration Tables

Field Semi Static Forwarding Description When Semi-static forwarding database feature is enabled, all the learnt MAC address entries of DSL ports in forwarding database are treated as static configured entry. These entries are not aged out based on aging timer, and these entries are not overwritten by new traffic. These entries are displayed as dynamic entries in Netman 4000. Value range: Disable / Enable (flush on port down) / Enabled (flush on port lock) Default: Disable Gateway ARP Filter The IPADSL module supports a gateway ARP filtering function. When feature is enabled, the IPADSL module monitors the ARP request/reply packets on all ADSL port uplink traffic. The ARP packet is discarded if its "sender protocol address" matches the gateway address configured by the user. The packet discard counter for that bridge port is increased accordingly. Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Disable Gateway IP Address Aging Timer Value range: Valid IP address To set the bridge ageing timer. The default timer length is 14400 seconds (4 hours). After this interval all the forwarding table entries are flushed. Value range: 10 to 1000000 seconds Default: 14400 Unknown VLAN The treatment to unknown VLAN tagged frames. Value range: Discard / Forward Default: Discard Upstream Multicast Filter By enabling this option, the upstream multicast packet will be forwarded to all the ports if they are IP or ARP broadcast packets. OR they will be forwarded as per IGMP snooping rules if it's a IGMP multicast packet with IGMP snooping enabled. Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Disable IGMP last query interval IGMP last query interval Value range: 1-255 Default: 2 IGMP no-response-leave query interval IGMP no-response-leave query interval Value range: 1-255 Default: 2 ILMI Based CPE Management Enable or disable Interim Local Management Interface for CPE management. When enabled, IPxDSL modules forward the SNMP trap received from ILMI channel to Netman server address. Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Enable ARP Tracking Provides information on the mapping between subscriber's IP address and MAC address. It is implemented by snooping the ARP traffic passing through the module. The ARP table provides a history of snooping results. Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Disable

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

86

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Table 19 Batch - Module Configuration Tables

Field NetBIOS Filter Description When NetBIOS filter is enabled, incoming packet filters are applied on all ADSL ports and Ethernet port; to filter out (discard) the NetBIOS packets that are encapsulated over TCP/UDP or directly carried by IEEE 802.2 LLC Value range: Disabled / Uplink Only / Both Directions Default: Uplink Only DHCP Filter This can be used to avoid subscribers getting DHCP service from an unauthorized DHCP server if existing on a user port.

Uplink Filter - When enabled, an incoming packet filter is applied on all ADSL ports, as a result, all DHCP server to client packets are discarded Downlink Filter - When enabled, an outgoing packet filter is applied on all ADSL ports, as the result, all DHCP client to server packets are discarded

Value range: Disabled / Uplink Only / Downlink Only / Both directions Default: Disabled DLF Counter (Database Lookup Failure) Database Lookup Failure (DLF) occurs when the IPxDSL module cannot find an entry, within its database, for the incoming Ethernet frame. The IPxDSL module allows operator to limit the rate of total DLF frames that could be forwarded (e.g. broadcast) by the bridge. Within a period of one second, if the total number of DLF frames (including the latest one) is less or equal to the threshold specified by the user, the latest DLF frame are forwarded to all ports excluding the one from which the DLF frame is received; if the total number of DLF frames is larger than the threshold specified by the user, the latest DLF frame is discarded. The discarding is counted in the bridge discarding PM counter. Value range: 10 - 65535 DLF frames per second Default: 100 IGMP Snooping IGMP is a protocol used by IP hosts to register their dynamic multicast group membership. The switches uses information in the IGMP packets to determine which segments should receive packets directed to the group address. IGMP snooping allows bridges to monitor IGMP packets and reduces the flooding of IP multicast traffic through the ADSL access line. Value range: Enabled, forward unknown/ Enabled, discard unknown / Disabled Default: Enabled, discard unknown DHCP Option 82 The DHCP relay agent information option (option 82) enables a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay agent to include information about itself when forwarding client-originated DHCP packets to a DHCP server. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other parameter-assignment policies.iAN8K B1000 supports DHCP Option 82 feature on all linecard modules in compliance with IETF RFC3046 with some exceptions as explained above. This feature is enabled/disabled on a per module basis. The Option 82 feature is disabled by default. Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Enable

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Video Service Menu

87

Table 19 Batch - Module Configuration Tables

Field IGMP last query count Description IGMP last query count Value range: 0 - 3 Default: 1 IGMP no-response-leave query count IGMP no-response-leave query count Value range: 1 - 3 Default: 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Enable or disable PPPoE Intermediate agent. The PPPoE Intermediate Agent intercepts PPPoE discovery packets, including PADI, PADO, PADR, and PADS. Upon reception of a PADI or PADR packet sent by the PPPoE client, the Intermediate Agent adds a TAG to the packet sent upstream. The TAG contains the identification of the DSL line on which the PADI or PADR packet was received. Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Enable

User can modify the module individually or click Select All to highlight all the modules of the same type. Click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Click Close in Figure 57 to exit the batch configuration window. Note: In case that part of the configuration is not allowed on one module (e.g. the ADSL port is unlocked therefore encapsulation method is not changed), Netman 4000 skips the entire configuration on the corresponding module, and continues with the rest of the modules.

Video Service Menu

iAN8K B1000 provides full video service management capabilities. iAN8K B1000 provides full video service management capabilities. iAN8K B1000 supports 256 video channels, including both full access and preview channels. Each channel can be individually configured for the data rate, maximum duration for each preview, maximum number of previews, and blackout duration after each preview. Each broadcast channel is logically mapped to a multicast group and the multicast groups can be grouped together into up to 32 different service packages. A CAC facility is provided at the line card level which can be used to ensure video bandwidth for each port on the card as well as the entire card. Users can be assigned any number of packages with authentication performed at the PVC level. The steps required for provisioning video services in which all subscribers are assigned a package of channels consists of the following steps. Refer to Appendix A - Access Configuration Example for details. 1 Enable IGMP snooping on ICM3 2 Enable IGMP snooping on each linecard 3 Create multicast group
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

88

Chapter 2: Device Manager

4 Create multicast packages 5 Create users 6 Enable authentication on each PVC 7 Check usage statistics iAN8K B1000 supports the following options for video service configuration:

Multicast Group Packaging Access Control Usage Statistics

Multicast Group Packaging

Select Multicast Group Packaging from Video Service menu. Multicast group packaging supports the following configuration:

Default Rate Multicast Group Multicast Package

Default Rate Select Multicast Group Packaging from Video Service menu and the Default Rate window is promoted as shown in Figure 58. Figure 58 allows configuration on the default data rate of the learned multicast group. The default value is 4000 and the value range is from 64 to 32000 Kbps. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Modify the rate and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Figure 58 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Default Rate

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Video Service Menu

89

Multicast Group Select Multicast Group Packaging from Video Service menu and select Multicast Group tab to open Figure 59. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 20 for more information. Figure 59 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Group

Table 20 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Group Field Description
Field Group Name Description The name of the multicast group. Value range: a character string up to 32 characters. IP Address The IP address of the multicast group Value range: valid IP address Rate The committed data rate of the multicast group to be used in CAC calculations. Value range: 64 - 32000 Default: 4000

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

90

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Table 20 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Group Field Description
Field Session Timeout Description The maximum number of seconds the user can access this multicast group. This attribute is enforced when the subscriber has limited access to this multicast group. When a session time exceeds configured session timeout, the subscriber's DSL interface is removed from the multicast group, and all future joins are prohibited until the subscriber's session time is reset. The session time is recognized only if it exceeds recognition time. The session time is cumulative. Value range: 1 - 6000 Default: 120 Max Joint Count The maximum number of times a particular user can join this multicast group. This attribute is enforced when the subscriber has limited access to this multicast group. When a subscriber's join count exceeds the MAX Join count, the subscriber's DSL interface is removed from the multicast group, and all future joins are prohibited until the subscriber's join count is reset. Max join count is not updated if the session time is less than the recognition time. Value range: 1 - 100 Default: 10 Blackout Period The wait time between two consecutive join of a multicast group by the same subscriber. This attribute is enforced when the subscriber has limited access to this multicast group. Value range: 1 - 7200 Default: 60

Click Add in Figure 59 to create a new entry. Or select an entry and click Modify to modify an existing entry. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 60. Figure 60 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Group - Add

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Video Service Menu

91

Select an entry in Figure 59 and click Delete to remove an existing entry. Multicast Package Select Multicast Group Packaging from Video Service menu and select Multicast Package tab to open Figure 61. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 21 for more information. Figure 61 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Package

Table 21 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Package Field Description
Field Package Name Multicast group list Description The name of the multicast package. The name of the multicast group. Up to 256 multicast group names.

Click Add in Figure 61 to create a new entry. Or select an entry in Figure 61 and click Modify to modify an existing entry. Check mark the groups and click Apply in Figure 62.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

92

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 62 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - Multicast Package Add

Select an entry in Figure 61 and click Delete to remove an existing entry. Access Control Select Access Control from Video Service menu. Access control supports the following configuration:

Account lockout Policy Reset Period User Account

Account lockout Policy Select Access Control from Video Service menu and the Account Lockout Policy window is promoted as shown in Figure 63. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Modify the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Refer to Table 22 for more information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Video Service Menu

93

Figure 63 Video Service - Access Control - Account Lockout Policy

Table 22 Video Service - Access Control - Account Lockout Policy Field Description
Field Quiet Period (seconds) Description 0-300 disables quiet period. Default: 10 Max Consecutive Failures 1-100 Default: 20

Reset Period Select Access Control from Video Service menu and select Reset Period tab to open Figure 64. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Modify the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

94

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 64 Video Service - Access Control - Reset Period

User Account Create multicast users to enforce authentication against the video services. Users can be granted full or limited access to packages, providing an additional level of capability. The user entries are placed in a database located on the ICM3 and it supports a maximum of 1024 users. It is important to know that the authentication database is for the entire iAN8K B1000, i.e. for all line cards in the iAN8K B1000 system. Further it is important to know that each iAN8K B1000 has its own database. Select Access Control from Video Service menu and select User Account tab to open Figure 65. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 65 Video Service - Access Control - User Account

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Video Service Menu

95

Click Add in Figure 65 to create a new entry. Or select an entry and click Modify to modify an existing entry. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 66. The format and parameters of the user name are: node_id:shelf_id:slot_id:port_id:vpi.vci

node_id: an integer from 1 to 9999 shelf_id: an integer from 1 to 4 slot_id: an integer from 1 to 16 port_id: an integer from 1 to the number of DSL ports vpi.vci: ATM virtual circuit over the DSL line

Figure 66 Video Service - Multicast Group Packaging - User Account - Add

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

96

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Select an entry in Figure 65 and click Delete to remove an existing entry. Usage Statistics The iAN8K B1000 collects usage statistics on a per multicast user basis. A record is triggered when a user leaves a multicast group. A usage recognition time provides a specific period of time before a channel switchover (multicast leave and join) is recognized as a true channel change. This is to avoid unnecessary record generation due to channel surfing. This factor comes into play because the iAN8K B1000 has storage for 2400 usage records before a rollover occurs. Select Usage Statistics from Video Service menu. Usage statistics supports the following configuration:

Call Usage Recognition Time Usage Statistics

Call Usage Recognition Time Select Usage Statistics from Video Service menu and the Call Usage Recognition Time window is promoted as shown in Figure 67. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Modify the parameter and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Figure 67 Video Service - Usage Statistics - Call Usage Recognition Time

Usage Statistics Select Usage Statistics from Video Service menu and select Usage Statistics tab to open Figure 68. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Tools Menu

97

Figure 68 Video Service - Usage Statistics - Usage Statistics

Tools Menu
MAC Tracing MAC tracing is to identify the subscriber location according to the given MAC address and VLAN. With the subscriber MAC address and VLAN ID, iAN8K B1000 can lookup the forwarding table to check which DSL port the subscriber come from. Four cases may encounter: 1 Cannot find the MAC address binding with VLAN ID throughout the IPiAN8K B1000. In this case, respond "Cannot identify"; 2 The IPiAN8K B1000 finds the request MAC address binding with VLAN ID is learned at uplink port, respond "The subscriber may be connected to other equipment"; 3 The IPiAN8K B1000 finds the MAC address binding with VLAN ID is learned internal port connected to LC at ICM board but cannot find it at corresponding LC, respond "Cannot identify"; 4 A successful lookup. Respond the subscriber port information of shelf ID, slot ID, port ID and VLAN ID. The VLAN ID is the requested VLAN ID. Select MAC Tracing from Tools menu to open Figure 69. Configure the parameters and click Get to obtain the trace information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

98

Chapter 2: Device Manager

Figure 69 Tools - MAC Tracing

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

PROVISIONING - NODE

This chapter provides configuration information for iAN8K B1000 node. iAN8K B1000 supports the following node level configuration:

System IP Address Time Server NMP Access ARP Routing Table Reset Master Shelf Configuration Slave Shelves Configuration Linecard Image File Information

System

Select the node to display the system information shown in Figure 70. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest configuration information. Modify the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 23 for more information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

100

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

Figure 70 Node - System Window

Table 23 Node - System Table

Parameter System Uptime System Description System Name System Location Contact Information Description The duration of time that the node is up since the last reset. The type of the system A unique name given to the node for identification The physical location of the node Contact information customized by the administrator

IP Address

Netman 4000 uses IP addressing to identify all the iAN8K B1000 nodes in a network for network management. Each node in the network must have a unique IP address to ensure reliable network management connectivity. The IP pool consists of IP addresses assigned to ICM3 modules and every IPxDSL modules in the system. The IP addresses must be configured properly prior to the system starts up. To avoid service interruption, do not change the configuration in this section during the operation. Select the node and click IP Address tab to open Figure 71. Refer to Table 24 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IP Address

101

Figure 71 Node - IP Address Window

Table 24 Node - IP Address Table

IP Address ICM IP address Primary IP The IP address of the node. This is the management IP address assigned to ICM3. Value range: valid IP address Default: 10.20.30.1 Subnet Mask A mask used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to. Value range: valid netmask Default: 255.255.255.0 Trap Destination to Netman Destination 1 The first IP address of the PCs to which the trap messages will be sent. One of these is generally set to the IP Address of the Netman 4000 Server (on an Ethernet network) and it is recommended that the other be set as the PPP Interface Peer address of the node. Value range: valid IP address Destination 2 The second IP address of the PCs to which the trap messages will be sent. One of these is generally set to the IP Address of the Netman 4000 Server (on an Ethernet network) and it is recommended that the other be set as the PPP Interface Peer address of the node. Value range: valid IP address Description

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

102

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

Table 24 Node - IP Address Table

IP Address IP Pool for Line Card Starting IP Address The starting IP address of IPxDSL modules in the IP Pool. Value range: valid IP address Default: 192.168.100.1 Subnet Mask A mask used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to. Value range: valid netmask Default: 255.255.255.0 IP Pool Size The size of the IP Pool. The entire range is the sum of starting address of the IP Pool and the size. Default: 33 Read only. IP Pool for Standby ICM Starting IP Address The starting IP address of the standby ICM3 module in the IP Pool. Value range: valid IP address Default: 192.168.200.1 Subnet Mask A mask used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to. Value range: valid netmask Default: 255.255.255.0 IP Pool Size The size of the IP Pool. The entire range is the sum of starting address of the IP Pool and the size. Default: 2 Read only Description

Modify the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest configuration information. Note: The following trap categories for the trap messages are supported:

ICM module cold start LC module cold start DSL link down DSL link up Ethernet link on ICM down Ethernet link on ICM up Removal of module Fan Alarm Power module failure Session record reporting enabled Session record reporting disabled IGMP joint over CAC threshold
July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Time Server

103

Invalid community string in the received SNMP message Invalid username or password detected during CLI login

Time Server

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) and Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) are widely used to synchronize computer clocks in the global Internet. It provides comprehensive mechanisms to access national time and frequency dissemination service, organize the time-synchronization subnet and adjust the local clock in each participating subnet peer. In most places of today's Internet, NTP provides accuracies of 1-50 ms depending on the characteristics of the synchronization source and network paths. NTP and SNTP are designed for use by clients and servers with a wide range of capabilities and over a wide range of network delays and jitter characteristics. Assigning a SNTP server address helps maintaining a synchronous time across nodes spread out over a geographical area. It thus provides more accuracy in report generation and statistical analysis. Select the node and click Time Server tab to open Figure 72. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest configuration information. Modify the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Figure 72 Node - Time Server Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

104

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

NMP Access

iAN8K B1000 system supports network management port (NMP) access control. Netman 4000 allows user to disable and enable the NMP access control based on SNMP, telnet or both. The iAN8K B1000 node processes SNMP/Telnet packets from legitimate IP source address/Netman 4000 clients only. Packets containing illegitimate source address are discarded and the system generates system log entries when receiving these packets. IP source addresses are designated legitimate by creating an access list. There can be up to three entries in for SNMP access list and up to ten entries for Telnet access list. Each entry contains an IP address and a network mask. Different classes of IP address and mask can be used to designate a range of IP address as legitimate IP addresses. By default NMP is disabled. Select the node and click NMP Access tab to open Figure 73. Refer to SNMP section or Telnet section for more configuration details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

NMP Access

105

Figure 73 Node - NMP Access Window

SNMP

In the Snmp section of Figure 73, click Add button and Figure 74 prompts for SNMP information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to add the entry. Maximum of 3 SNMP entries can be configured.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

106

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

Figure 74 Node - NMP Access - Add SNMP Entry Window

Select an entry in Figure 73 and click Delete to remove the SNMP entry. SNMP must be disabled before an entry can be removed. Select the Enable or Disable radio button and click Apply to enable or disable SNMP access control. Click Retrieve in the SNMP section to obtain the latest configuration information. Telnet In the Telnet section of Figure 73, click Add button and Figure 75 prompts for telnet information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to add the entry. Maximum of 10 Telnet entries can be configured. Figure 75 Node - NMP Access - Add Telnet Entry Window

Select an entry in Figure 75 and click Delete to remove the telnet entry. Telnet must be disabled before an entry can be removed. Select the Enable or Disable radio button and click Apply to enable or disable Telnet access control. Click Retrieve in the telnet section to obtain the latest configuration information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

ARP

107

ARP

ICM3 module learns ARP entries from the received ARP request messages. iAN8K B1000 ensures that any IP traffic originated from the DSL subscriber only appears on one and only one subscriber Ethernet interface. Hence, the ICM3 module can correctly discover and associate the subscriber IP address with the Ethernet interface and insert a route entry into the routing table without static configuration or the aid of complex dynamic routing protocols ICM3 sends ARP requests when it needs to:

resolve correct mapping between an IP address and MAC address a complete ARP entry times out ARP response timeout for incomplete ARP entries.

A complete ARP cache entry is one that has complete MAC and IP address mapping. Timeout triggers new address resolution (confirmation) attempt. If the attempt succeeds, the timer restarts. If it fails, the entry will not be used for forwarding and the user shall see the entry as incomplete. The timeout for new incomplete dynamic ARP entries during address resolution for is three times of the retransmission timeout. After timeout the entry is not used for forwarding and it is displayed as incomplete. An incomplete ARP cache entry is one that does not have full MAC address information. Select the node and click ARP tab to open Figure 76. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 25 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

108

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

Figure 76 Node - ARP Window

Table 25 Node - ARP Field Description

Field Complete Entry Timeout Description Valid range: 1 - 30 minutes 0: Disable Default: 20 minutes Retransmission Timeout Valid range: 1 - 30 seconds Default: 1 second VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Type VLAN ID number The MAC address of a subscriber. The IP address of a subscriber. Value range: Dynamic / Static Static ARP entries remains in the table until manually deleted by the operator.

When the Complete Entry Timeout or the Retransmission Timeout is modified, the new timers do not effect the existing ARP entries. Those existing entries continue to use the previous timer value until the complete entry timer expires. Then when the ICM3 refreshes those entries, the new timer is used for these entries.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual July 2006

Routing Table

109

Click Add in Figure 76 and Figure 77 prompts for new entry information. Or select an entry in Figure 76 and click Modify to modify the entry. Configure the parameters and click Apply to create the new entry. Figure 77 Node - ARP - Add Window

Select a static entry in Figure 76 and click Delete to remove a static entry. Or click Delete All to remove all entries. Note: only static entry can be deleted.

Routing Table

This section provides configuration for management data route only. The subscriber data routing is governed by the data plane routing table. Please refer to Chapter 4 - Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module for more information. The default route is indicated by a destination IP address of 0.0.0.0 with the subnet mask of 0.0.0.0. Only ONE default route can be set in the system to be used for both management and data traffic. This shall be kept in mind when planning and provisioning a default route in the network. Select the node and click the Routing Table tab to open Figure 78. Click Retrieve in the to obtain the latest configuration information. Refer to Table 26 for more information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

110

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

Figure 78 Node - Routing Table Window

Table 26 Node - Routing Table Table

Field Number Type Destination Description Index number of the entries Value range: Static / Connected Interface Destination IP address The default route is indicated by a destination IP address of 0.0.0.0 with the subnet mask of 0.0.0.0. Subnet Mask Gateway Address Subnet mask Gateway IP address

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Reset

111

Table 26 Node - Routing Table Table

Field Interface Metric Description The VLAN interface Route metric. Not applicable to static routes. Value range:

1 - 65535 for internal routes 1 - 1667214 for external routes

Administrative Distance

Configurable for static routes. Read only for dynamic routes. 0 for connected interface routes.1 for all other static routes. Value range: 0 - 255

Click Add to add a new entry in Figure 79. Configure the parameters and click Apply to add the entry. Figure 79 Node - Routing Table - Add Window

Select an entry and click Delete in Figure 78 to delete a specific entry.

Reset

Netman 4000 provides reset function that allows software reset or hardware reset on the node and the modules.

ICM3 module ICM3 supports both hardware and software reset.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

112

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

The hardware reset on the ICM3 will forcibly move any ICM3 upgrade image in flash to memory and boot with the new image irrespective of whether the new image is the same, higher or lower than the previous image version. The software reset is used to recover the module from any software loop conditions or other anomalies. The ICM3 also checks if there is a higher version upgrade image available in the flash. If so then the higher version is moved from the flash to the running memory and the ICM3 boots with the new upgrade image.

Line module Hardware reset forces download of software image from ICM3 to a line card irrespective of the version on the line card. For virtual modules, this hardware reset is performed after a software reset. The hardreset forces line module to download software image from ICM3 before reboot. If the corresponding LC software image is not in the ICM3 flash during the hardreset, the reset is applied but no download of software image from ICM3 is required. The softreset allows line modules to check the software version and software is downloaded when there is a higher version available in ICM 3Flash than the one running on the module. If the corresponding LC software image is not in the ICM3 flash or has equal or lower version, the reset is applied but no download of software image from ICM is required. A software reset can also be used to recover the module from any software loop conditions or other anomalies. A typical example is; though the card is physically presented in the system but the system does not recognize the module correctly. In such scenarios, a software reset shall be followed by a hardware reset.

PCU module PCU supports both hardware and software reset. The hard reset forces the PCU module to download software image from ICM3 and reboot. The soft reset forces the PCU module to reboot without downloading software image from ICM3. There is no checking of software version during the soft reset.

ISM module ISM module supports only software reset. The soft reset forces the ISM module to reboot. For module software upgrade and download, please refer to Chapter 11 System Administration for more information.

ASM module ASM module supports only software reset. The soft reset forces the ASM module to reboot. For module software upgrade and download, please refer to Chapter 11 System Administration for more information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Reset

113

Select the node and click Reset tab to open Figure 80. All modules are indicated with its shelf ID and slot ID. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest modules information. Figure 80 Node - Reset Window

CAUTION: If you reset the system after erasing all configurations the communication via SNMP (Netman) will be disabled. By design the AN-2000 IPiAN8K B1000 wont communicate over SNMP with Netman (or any other SNMP Manager) until the Netman IP address has been entered. Youll need to configure one or two Netman IP addresses via CLI command netman-destination found on page 325 of the CLI manual to restore SNMP.
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

114

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

There are 2 possible entries here for primary and secondary for the Netman address. It basically maps to the Trap Destination Setup on Netmans Device Manager screen. As long as these addresses are non-zero it will allow SNMP communication. The addresses dont have to point to valid Netman Server addresses. However youll need valid addresses if you expect to receive traps from the node at these locations. For ICM3 module, select the module from Reset ICM3 section and click Hard Rest or Soft Reset radio button. Click Reset to begin the reset. For IPxDSL and PCU modules, select the module from Reset Module section and click Hard Rest or Soft Reset radio button. Click Reset to begin the reset. For ISM module or ASM module, select the module and click Soft Reset radio button. Click Reset to begin the reset. The Reset button is not available if the Hard Reset radio button is selected.

Master Shelf Configuration

Master Shelf Configuration provides basic information of the master and slave shelves. It also allows registering and deregistering slave shelves to the master shelf. All slave shelves must register to the Authorized Slave Shelf in order to communicate with the master shelf. Note: This feature is applicable when there are slave shelves configured in the node. Select the node and click Master Shelf Configuration tab to open Figure 81. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Select a slave shelf ID in the Authorized Slave Shelves Information section and click Delete or Add to deregister or register the shelf. Refer to Table 27 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Master Shelf Configuration

115

Figure 81 Node - Master Shelf Configuration Window

Table 27 Node - Master Shelf Configuration Table

Field Master Information Master Shelf Id Last Command Time Last Command Type Value range: 1 ~ 8 The timestamp of the last command Value range: SNMP / CLI Description

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

116

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

Table 27 Node - Master Shelf Configuration Table

Field Last Command Result Description last per-command generic configuration synchronization result Value range: Successful / Not Successful Registered Slave Shelves Count Reachable Slave Shelves Count Generic Flash Version Generic Runtime Version Accepting Generic Configuration Changes Tftp Trigger Number of shelves registered Number of shelves registered and reachable Flash entire generic configuration version # Runtime entire generic configuration version # Value range: Yes / No / Busy Slave shelf base part application image file synchronization control Flag. This value applies to all slaves shelves. Value range: Force Sync on Slave Lower Version / Never Sync Authorized Slave Shelves Information Authorized slave shelves Value range: 1 ~ 8 excluding master shelf id

Note: Adding or deleting shelf in the authorized slave list will not automatically update the node tree on the left, since it is possible that only the configuration has been added at this point but these slave shelves have not yet registered. The user must update the node tree manually.

Slave Shelves Configuration

Slave Shelves Configuration provides basic information of the slave shelves. It provides the option to erase all configuration data of multiple shelves at once. It also supports manual synchronization of entire generic configuration between master shelf and selected slave shelf. Note: This feature is applicable when there are slave shelves configured in the node. Select the node and click Slave Shelves Configuration tab to open Figure 82. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 28 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slave Shelves Configuration

117

Figure 82 Node - Slav Shelves Configuration Window

Table 28 Node - Slav Shelves Configuration Table

Field Shelf ID Description Slave shelf ID number Value range: 1 ~ 8 Registered Time MAC Address Reachable Status The date and time of the slave shelf registered with the master shelf MAC address of the slave shelf The status of the slave shelf Value range: Reachable / Unreachable Last Generic Conf Sync Start time Generic Conf Sync Status Last entire generic configuration synchronization starting time Last entire generic configuration synchronization result Value range: Success / Failure / No need to synchronize F/W Sync Status Firmware synchronization status Value range: Synchronized / Not Synchronized Erase All Data Erase all configuration data of the shelf Drop down box selection Value range: No / Yes
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

118

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

Table 28 Node - Slav Shelves Configuration Table

Field Generic Flash Version Generic Runtime Version Current Firmware Version Updated Firmware Version Description Flash entire generic configuration version number Runtime entire generic configuration version number Current generic configuration version number Updated generic configuration version number

Select a slave shelf and click Manual Sync to synchronize the entire generic configuration between master shelf and the selected slave shelf. Select another shelf and proceed with the same procedure if needed. Select Yes from the Erase All Data drop down box to erase the configuration data for the selected shelves. Click Apply to confirm the erase.

Linecard Image File Information

Linecard Image File Information provides basic information of the firmware on the slave shelves ICM3 modules. This is used to determine the software currently available from ICM3 for upgrade process or module reset. Note: This feature is applicable when there are slave shelves configured in the node. Select the node and click Linecard Image File Information tab to open Figure 83. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 29 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Linecard Image File Information

119

Figure 83 Node - Linecard Image File Information Window

Table 29 Node - Linecard Image File Information Table

Field Shelf ID Linecard Firmware File Name Linecard Firmware File Version Description Slave shelf ID number Linecard firmware file name currently on the slave shelf ICM3 Linecard firmware file version number currently on the slave shelf ICM3

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

120

Chapter 3: Provisioning - Node

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

PROVISIONING - ICM3/3G MODULE

This chapter provides configuration procedures for IP Concentration Module (ICM3/3G). The IP Concentration Module (ICM3/3G) is a high performance module that provides system controller, management and L2/L3 functionality to IP DSLAM system. Additionally the ICM3/3G provides FE/GE uplinks interfaces providing connectivity to IP networks. ICM3/3G is the mandatory module for IP DSLAM Release 3.x system. It controls all other line modules in the system and it also provides element management agent function and connects to Netman 4000 EMS. Figure 84 and Figure 85 shows the main window of the ICM3/3G provisioning management. Figure 84 Provisioning - ICM3 Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

122

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 85 Provisioning - ICM3GWindow

ICM3/3G Module supports the following configurations:

Node Level Configuration

Reset

Module Summary Shelf Level Configuration Slot Level Configuration

ICM3/3G Forwarding Database Mirror Port Trunk Group Protection Link Redundancy Support Switchover

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Node Level Configuration

123

VBAS External Ethernet Port (Standby ICM3/3G module only)

Port Level Configuration

Ethernet Port Configuration RSTP VLAN Multicast Routing (Master shelf ICM3 module only) DHCP (Master shelf ICM3/3G module only) Packet Classification (Master shelf ICM3/3G module only) QoS

Node Level Configuration

Reset

ICM3/3G module supports module reset at the node level configuration.

ICM3/3G module supports both hardware reset and software reset through Netman 4000. The hardware reset on the ICM3/3G will forcibly move any ICM3/3G upgrade image in flash to memory and boot with the new image irrespective of whether the new image is the same, higher or lower than the previous image version. The software reset is used to recover the module from any software loop conditions or other anomalies. The ICM3/3G also checks if there is a higher version upgrade image available in the flash. If so then the higher version is moved from the flash to the running memory and the ICM3/3G boots with the new upgrade image. Select the node and click Reset tab to open Figure 86. All modules are indicated with its shelf ID and slot ID. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest modules information. Select an ICM3/3G module, click Hard Rest or Soft Reset radio button and click Reset to begin the reset.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

124

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 86 ICM3 - Node - Reset Window

Module Summary

Module Summary section provides basic information and module location for PCU module. Expand the node from the navigation tree and select Module Summary to open Figure 88 or Figure 88. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 30 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Module Summary

125

Figure 87 ICM3G- Module Summary Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

126

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 88 ICM3- Module Summary Window

Table 30 ICM3/3G - Module Summary Table

Field Module Entity Description Module type Module location X-Y: Shelf X Slot Y PCU module is always at slot P Hardware Version Software Version Module hardware version number Module software version number

Shelf Level Configuration

The shelf level configuration provides the actual slot occupier for the entire chassis. Expand the node from the navigation tree and select Shelf to open Figure 89 or Figure 90. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Shelf Level Configuration

127

Figure 89 ICM3 - Shelf View Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

128

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 90 ICM3G - Shelf View Window

In Figure 89 or Figure 90, the ICM3/3G modules are represented with board images in slot A and B. Double click on the board image opens the Slot Level Configuration. Table 31 lists the guidelines for module placement and virtual configuration detail. Table 31 ICM3/3G Module Placements Details
Module Type ICM3/3G Maximum Number of Board Per Shelf Slot Used 2 A, B Virtual Configuration No

Slot Level Configuration

Active ICM3/3G module supports the following configuration at the slot level:

ICM3/3G Forwarding Database Mirror Port Trunk Group

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

129

Protection Link Redundancy Support Switchover VBAS

Standby ICM3/3G module supports the following configuration at the slot level:

ICM3/3G External Ethernet Port

Note: On the ICM3/3G modules, retain only the files required for the modules existed in the node. Keeping unnecessary files will consume the flash memory, which may hinder the synchronization between the active and standby ICM3/3G. ICM3/3G Select the active or standby ICM3/3G module from the tree view to open Figure 91. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 32 for more details. Figure 91 ICM3/3G - ICM3 Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

130

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 32 ICM3/3G - ICM3/3G Table

Field Name Hardware Version Software Version Serial Number Uptime Description The current hardware version for the ICM3/3G module. The current software version for the ICM3/3G module. Module serial number The duration of time that the ICM3/3G module is up since the last reset

Forwarding Database

The switch configuration window displays and allows the configuration of layer 2 switch related information. The Address Resolution Logic (ARL), on receiving a destination address, determines the destination port number to identify the port the frames will be forwarded to. If the ARL cannot find and identify the Destination Address (DA), the frame is treated as a frame with an unknown DA. One of the following mechanisms can be used to handle the frames with unknown DA.

When DLF frame discard is enabled, the MAC frame with unknown unicast destination address is discarded. When DLF frame forward is enabled, the MAC frame with unknown unicast destination address is sent to all ports in the same VLAN except the source port. Broadcast frames are forwarded to all ports within the same VLAN except the source port itself.

Select the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Forwarding Database tab to open Figure 92. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Refer to Table 33 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

131

Figure 92 ICM3/3G - Forwarding Database Window

Table 33 ICM3/3G - Forwarding Database Table

Field DLF frame Description To discard the MAC frame with unknown unicast destination address or to forward the MAC frame with unknown unicast destination address to all ports in the same VLAN, except the source port. Value range: Forward / Discard Default: Forward Aging timer The layer two switch-aging timer in seconds. The aging time is the number of seconds a MAC address is kept in the forwarding database after having received a packet from this MAC address. The entries in the forwarding database are periodically timed out to ensure they won't remain in the table forever. Value range: 10 - 1000000 seconds Default: 300 seconds VLAN ID Static Entries MAC Address Port ID VLAN ID The Mac address of the port. The port ID number The VLAN ID number To display the forwarding rules of the selected VLAN

Click Reset in Figure 92 to reset the switch engine for the selected VLAN.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

132

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Click Dynamic Entry in Figure 92 to view dynamic entry lists shown in Figure 93. Select a VLAN ID in Figure 93 and click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Click Close to exit the window. Figure 93 ICM3/3G - Forwarding Database - Dynamic Entry Window

Click Add in Figure 92 to create a new static entry. Configure the parameters and click Add in Figure 94. Figure 94 ICM3/3G - Forwarding Database - Add Window

Select an entry and click Delete in Figure 92 to remove the entry. Mirror Port Port Mirroring is a process whereby one switch port, the mirror port, can be configured to reflect the traffic appearing on another port, the monitored port.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

133

ICM3/3G allows any port (external FE, GE) to be the mirror port to monitor transmit and/or receive activity of any of remaining FE or GE port. Two different ports can be configured as monitored ports simultaneously, one for transmit traffic and one for receive traffic. The receive-port and transmit-port can be the same port. The bandwidth of the receive-port and transmit-port cannot exceed the mirror-port. Otherwise the mirror port is not able to fully capture the traffic on the monitored ports. Select the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Mirror Port tab to open Figure 95. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Refer to Table 34 for more details. Figure 95 ICM3/3G - Mirror Port Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

134

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 34 ICM3/3G - Mirror Port Table

Field Mirror Port Description One external port only. Internal FE ports can not be used as mirror ports. If neither mirrored receive ports nor mirrored transmit ports are specified, the mirror port can only be used to mirror traffic classified by ACLs. Value range: None / FE1 ~ FE4 / GE1 ~ GE2 Default: None Mirrored Receive Port One internal port or external port/trunk except for the mirror port Value range: None / Internal 1~ Internal 16 / FE1 ~ FE4 / GE1 ~ GE2 Default: None Mirrored Transmit Port One internal port or external port/trunk except for the mirror port Value range: None / Internal 1~ Internal 16 / FE1 ~ FE4 / GE1 ~ GE2 Default: None

Note: A port cannot be configured as mirror port if it is a part of a trunk group and vice-versa. Mirrored transmit port and receive port can be the same port or different port. Trunk Group Port trunking or link aggregation is used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high-bandwidth data pipeline. The participating parts are called members of a trunk group. ICM3/3G module supports link aggregation of 2 or 4 ports into a logical link of up to 400 Mbps. The two GE ports can also be aggregated to for a 2 Gbps trunk port. Ports that are used to support xDSL applications (internal ports) cannot be used for link aggregation. A port cannot be part of more than two trunk groups i.e. no overlapping is allowed. When a trunk group is created, static entries in forwarding database originally mapped to the member ports are now mapped to trunk port and dynamic entries are automatically removed. When a trunk is removed, entries in forwarding database or ARP entries mapped to trunk port are automatically removed. A trunk group cannot be created if one or more of the following condition exists:

The candidate trunk member port is an IGMP multicast router port The candidate trunk member port is a mirror port The candidate trunk member ports have different orientations The candidate trunk member ports belong to different VLANs The candidate trunk member ports have different DSCP priority mappings RIP, OSPF or PIM-SM is enabled on the VLAN interfaces associated with the trunk The trunk is a statically configured multicast router port

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

135

When a trunk group is deleted, the trunk port is removed from IGMP snooping/proxy results. The member port is not added to any multicast group until an IGMP report is later received from the port. ICM3/3G resets the following port parameters to the default values upon trunk deletion:

RSTP port path cost RSTP port priority Multicast limit DLF limit DSCP priority mapping In limit Out limit Broadcast limit Other port related parameters shall remain unaffected.

Select the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Trunk Group tab to open Figure 96. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 35 for more details. Figure 96 ICM3/3G - Trunk Group Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

136

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 35 ICM3/3G - Trunk Group Table

Field Trunk Group ID Description A unique ID number of the trunk group. Value range: Trunk 1 to 3 Trunk Group Name The name of the trunk group. Value range: a character string, maximum of 32 characters Port List Value range: FE1 - FE4 / GE1 - GE2

Click Add in Figure 96 to create a new group. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 97. Figure 98 prompts for trunk group rules. Click Ok to continue. Figure 97 ICM3/3G - Trunk Group - Add Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

137

Figure 98 ICM3/3G - Trunk Group - Add - Note Window

Select a group and click Delete in Figure 96 to remove a group. Protection Link The protection link for a single shelf configuration comprises one uplink from each ICM3/3G. The protection link for multi-shelf configuration comprises of multiple uplink/downlink pairs from ICM3/3Gs in the rack. Figure 99 illustrates the protection link for a multi-shelf configuration using single GE port for uplink/downlink.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

138

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 99 ICM3/3G - Protection Link Configuration

GE link GE link I S M (B) I S M (A) I C M 3 (B) I C M 3 (A)

Shelf 1

GE link

GE link

Shelf 2

I C M 3 (B)

I C M 3 (A)

GE link

GE link

Shelf 3

I C M 3 (B)

I C M 3 (A)

GE link

GE link

Shelf 4

I C M 3 (B)

I C M 3 (A)

ICM3/3G switchover occurs when one or more GE/FE ports in active ICM3/3G's protection link goes down while the standby ICM3/3G is in redundant state. The protection link status is propagated to the peer ICM3/3G and adjacent ICM3/3G in the protection link. When one or more GE/FE ports in standby ICM3/3G's protection link goes down, the ICM3/3G is put into protection link down prohibited state. The protection link status is propagated to the peer ICM3/3G and adjacent ICM3/3G in the protection link. This prohibits switchover from active link when the standby link is down. Once the fault is cleared, the protection link of the module is turned ON and the information is propagated to the rest of the links. As the result, the rest of protection links will come up for this propagation.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

139

Select the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Protection Link tab to open Figure 100. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 100 ICM3/3G - Protection Link

Table 36 ICM3/3G - Protection Link Table

Field Uplink Port of Protection Link Description Required for both single shelf system or multi-shelf system Value range: FE1 ~ FE4 / GE1 ~ GE2 / Trunk1 ~ Trunk3 Downlink Port of Protection Link Required for multi-shelf system Optional for single shelf system Value range: None / FE1 ~ FE4 / GE1 ~ GE2 / Trunk1 ~ Trunk3

Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. An uplink port is required and a downlink port is optional. Note: When a GE/FE port or trunk group has been configured as protection link, the system prohibits reconfiguration until it is removed from the protection link. Redundancy Support When two ICM3/3G modules are presented in the system, each assumes a different protection mode: one as active and one as standby. The active ICM3/3G is responsible for system management. The standby ICM3/3G is
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

140

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

synchronized with the active ICM3/3G and automatically takes over the management functionality when the active module fails. The first ICM3/3G plugged into the shelf becomes the active ICM3/3G; the second one becomes the standby ICM3/3G. If both ICM3/3Gs come up together, the ICM3/3G in slot A becomes active while the ICM3/3G in slot B becomes standby. The active ICM3/3G uses the IP address of its management port for the management of IP DSLAM system. The standby ICM3/3G does not have IP address on its management port. The active ICM3/3G and standby ICM3/3G communicate to each other via HDLC link (2Mbps). The default IP address used on HDLC interface is 192.168.200.1 and 192.168.200.2. Both IP address are configurable. IP DSLAM allows user to configure the standby ICM3/3G operation including:

Support redundancy Prohibit redundancy (default)

The standby ICM3/3G supports the following states:

Initializing Redundant Prohibited

The ICM3/3G states can be mapped to the administrative states, operational states, and standby status defined in ITU-T X.731 as follows:
Initializing Admin (RW) Operational (R) Standby (R) Unlocked Disabled N/A Prohibited Locked Disabled N/A Redundant Unlocked Enabled Hot standby Active Unlocked Enabled Providing service

Initialization state refers to the time period when standby ICM3/3G first power up to the point when it is fully synchronized with active ICM3/3G. After initialization state, the following conditions are applied to the standby ICM3/3G:

Containing the same flash files as the active ICM3/3G flash The running image is the same as the image on flash (in another words, standby ICM3/3G runs the image that is on active ICM3/3G flash). Synchronizing with the active ICM3/3G on running system information. If standby ICM3/3G is in initialization state, the active ICM3/3G rejects the following:

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

141

Any configuration change on the active ICM3/3G Any configuration change on the standby ICM3/3G Any configuration change on the line modules Reset module Download file to active ICM3/3G

Note: On the ICM3/3G modules, retain only the files required for the modules existed in the node. Keeping unnecessary files will consume the flash memory, which may hinder the synchronization between the active and standby ICM3/3G. Note: When replacing ICM3/3G module, ensure the flash memory of the replacement ICM3/3G is empty. After the standby ICM3/3G powers up, the active ICM3/3G verifies whether the standby ICM3/3G contains the same ICM3/3G image file as the one on its own flash image files. If a mismatch is detected, the active ICM3/3G downloads its version to the standby ICM3/3G and resets the standby ICM3/3G. If the standby ICM3/3G runs a higher version (this typically occurs in upgrade scenarios), an equipment alarm is raised. The standby ICM3/3G is changed to redundant state if allowed, which is configurable. This alarm is cleared after ICM3/3G switches over or the standby ICM3/3G is removed. If the standby ICM3/3G runs a lower version (this is an error condition), an equipment alarm is also raised. The standby ICM3/3G remains in initializing state and cannot be configured. This alarm is cleared after the standby ICM3/3G is removed In initializing and prohibited states, the standby ICM3/3G administratively locks the Ethernet ports Internal1~16, GE1~7 or FE1~4 and GE1~2. The port link status remains down. In redundant state, the standby ICM3/3G administratively unlocks the Ethernet ports Internal1~16, and sets the administrative status of GE1~7 or FE1~4 and GE1~2 per user's last configuration. The behavior of standby ICM3/3G operation during each state is as shown below:
Initialization Switchover Allow configuration change E1-E4, G1-G2 status Layer two switch process packet Not allowed No Locked, appear down No Prohibit Not allowed Yes Locked, appear down No Redundancy Allowed Yes Per user configuration No

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

142

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

The parameters that are synchronized in the standby ICM3/3G during runtime are shown below:
Parameters ISM configuration ASM configuration ICM3/3G configuration All other configuration File download to ICM3/3G Save configuration Outstanding alarm for active ICM3/3G All other outstanding alarm FWDB for ICM3/3G layer-two switch IGMP snooping results DHCP assignment, statistics MAC black list match CLI access history ICM3/3G switch port statistics SNMP access statistics ICM3/3G STP statistics ICM3/3G ARP table RADIUS transaction, statistics Real time synchronization of standby ICM3/3G No, ISM configuration is sent to ISM. ICM3/3G does not maintain ISM configuration No, ASM configuration is sent to ISM. ICM3/3G does not maintain ASM configuration Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No. The static entries configured on active ICM3/3G are automatically copied to standby ICM3/3G and therefore shall appear on both FWDB No. The static router port configured on active ICM3/3G are automatically copied to standby ICM3/3G and therefore shall appear on both results No Yes No No Yes No No No

If standby ICM3/3G cannot support switchover (in initialization or prohibit state), resetting active ICM3/3G is rejected and CLI/Netman 4000 display "Standby ICM3/3G is operationally disabled, switchover can not be performed". Select the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Redundancy Support tab to open Figure 101. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

143

Figure 101 ICM3/3G - Redundancy Support Window

Redundancy Setup via CLI In the initial system startup, ICM3/3G redundancy is disabled by default. The procedure below describes the set up of redundancy in the IP DSLAM system.

System startup

Issue CLI command redundancy to the active ICM3/3G on every shelf Issue CLI command protection-link G1 G2 to the active ICM3/3G on every shelf except the last shelf

Adding a Node to the last shelf

Install the shelf as the last shelf of the rack Connect GE links between the G1 port of ICMs of the last shelf and the G2 port of ICM3/3G of the previous shelf. The ICM3/3G connections should be slot A to slot A and slot B to slot B. Issue CLI command redundancy to the active ICM3/3G of the last shelf Issue CLI command protection-link G1 G2 to the active ICM3/3G of the previous shelf Issue CLI command protection-link G1 to the active ICM3/3G of the last shelf.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

144

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

If the active/standby ICM3/3G of the last shelf do not match the active/standby ICMs on the previous shelf, issue CLI command switchover to the active ICM of the last shelf

Removing a Node from the last shelf

Issue CLI command protection-link G1 to the active ICM3/3G of the previous shelf Remove GE links between the last shelf and the previous shelf Remove the last shelf from the rack

Switchover

Two types of switchover are be supported. Switchover is nonreversible.

Manual switchover - Operator manually switches over ICM3/3G. he manual switchover does not cause reset on existing ICM3/3G. It can not be preformed when standby ICM is in initialization or prohibited state. Automatic switchover - Initiated by ICM (active or standby). Automatic switchover is triggered when active ICM is reset or in major fault. The major fault conditions are those that will prevent system from switching user traffic, such as watchdog reset, and uplink failure.

Select the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Switchover tab to open Figure 102. Click Switch between active and standby ICM3/3G box and click Apply to start switching the ICM3/3G modules.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

145

Figure 102 ICM3/3G - Switchover Widow

If standby ICM3/3G cannot support switchover (in initialization or prohibit state), resetting active ICM3/3G is rejected and CLI/Netman 4000 display "Standby ICM3/3G is operationally disabled, switchover can not be performed". Note: Prior to switch to an ICM3/3G module or replace the old ICM3/3G module with a new ICM3/3G module, confirm the following:

The new ICM3/3G module contains the same configuration as the old ICM3/3G module. Or Insert the new ICM3/3G module without any configuration and download a copy of the previously saved configuration of the old ICM3/3G module.

VBAS

For the ADSL line identification purpose, a VBAS session between IPDSLAM and BAS is introduced during the PPP Authentication. After received PPP authentication request from subscriber, the BAS will send one VBAS request to IP DSLAM for the subscriber's information of shelf ID (Which may have been identified through the tagged VLAN ID to BAS.), slot ID and ADSL physical port ID. The IPDSLAM will respond the request with a VBAS response message to report the ADSL line identification information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

146

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

The IPDSLAM maintains a VBAS Client MAC Address in the database. This address is the DSLAM MAC address and it is statically configured at BAS for BAS to determine where the VBAS message shall be forwarded to. Each IPDSLAM has a unique VBAS client MAC address. Upon receiving a VBAS request message, the system check the destination MAC address at MAC layer. If the MAC address is same as "VBAS Client MAC Address" of the IPDSLAM, perform the normal identification operation. Otherwise, it is discarded by VBAS task. The IPDSLAM supports at least multiple concurrent active VBAS sessions. One active VBAS session means the IPDSLAM received a VBAS request message but does not respond yet. The VBAS Session ID is the label of each active session. Each active VBAS session has a maximum life-cycle of maximum response interval.

If the number of active VBAS sessions reaches the maximum session allowed, discard the further VBAS request message until a VBAS session is available again, i.e. one active VBAS session has ended with the VBAS respond message sent If received VBAS request message with a VBAS Session ID falls into the range of active VBAS sessions, discard this VBAS request message When the life-cycle of one active VBAS session reaches the maximum response interval, (a.k.a. active VBAS session expires), destroy this session and respond a VBAS response message with Operation Result Code; For an active VBAS session, sending a VBAS responding message is the last process for the IPDSLAM to end this active VBAS session.

Select the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select VBAS tab to open Figure 102. Modify the parameter and click Apply. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Click Reset Statistics to reset the counters. Refer to Table 37 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

147

Figure 103 ICM3/3G - VBAS Widow

Table 37 ICM3/3G - VBAS Table

Field General Administrative State Client MAC Address Number of Active Sessions Statistics Number of Requests Received Number of Error Requests Number of Discarded Requests Number of Responses Sent Number of Received VBAS Request Messages Number of Received Error VBAS Request Messages Number of Discarded VBAS Request Messages Number of Transmitted VBAS Response Messages Value range: Enabled / Disabled DSLAM MAC address. Each IPDSLAM has unique VBAS client MAC address The number of current active VBAS sessions Description

External Ethernet Port

This function allows the user to lock or unlock FE and GE ports for the standby ICM3/3G module. Select the standby ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select External Ethernet Port tab to open Figure 104. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Select a port and click Lock to lock the selected port. Select a port and click Unlock to unlock the selected port.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

148

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 104 Standby ICM3/3G - External Ethernet Port Window

Port Level Configuration

Active ICM3/3G module supports the following configuration at the port level:

Ethernet Port Configuration RSTP VLAN Multicast

IGMP Snooping IGMP Proxy PIM-SM (Master shelf ICM3 only)

Routing (Master shelf ICM3 only)

RIP OSPF ARP

DHCP (Master shelf ICM3/3G only) Packet Classification (Master shelf ICM3/3G only) QoS
July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Port Level Configuration

149

Ethernet Port Configuration

Maximum Ethernet Frame Length ICM3/3G module supports Ethernet frame length from 64 bytes to 1522 bytes (1518 bytes + 4-byte VLAN tag). Frames outside this range are classified as part of oversized frame.

Framing Filtering Frames with any kind of error are filtered. Error types include CRC, alignment, false carrier sense, short event, runt event, long event and jabber.

Jabber Lookup Protection A port is considered to be jabbering if it active for more than 50,000 bit periods continuously. A jabbering port is automatically partitioned from the system to prevent it from impairing system performance.

Auto Negotiation ICM3/3G module supports auto-negotiation for all 10/100Mbps ports as well as 100/1000Mbps ports with copper PHYs to adjust the mode of operation (half/full duplex and speed (10/100/1000 Mbps) according to the device at the other end of link. A manual mode of operation is also provided to enable the user to configure the operation mode, speed and flow-control. Gigabit ports always operate in full-duplex mode while the 10/100Mbps ports can operate in half-duplex or full-duplex mode. Auto-negotiation is not supported on 100/1000Mbps ports when optical PHYs are provided. Ports always operate as gigabit ports in this case.

Flow Control ICM3/3G module supports a flow control mechanism for each port that can be enabled or disabled by the user. Flow control activity is triggered when the buffer utilization exceeds the pre-defined thresholds of the dedicated port buffer and shared buffer. Pause frame based flow-control is used for full-duplex operation while backpressure based flow control is used for half-duplex operation.

Head of Line Blocking Protection Head of line blocking can be prevented by providing a limit on the maximum number of frames allowed in the queue. Frames at the queue input (i.e., queue tail) are dropped once this limit is reached.

Framing Forward

Unicast Frames The Address Resolution Logic (ARL), on receiving a destination address, determines the destination port number to identify the port the frames should be forwarded to. If the ARL cannot find identify the Destination Address (DA), the frame is treated as a frame with unknown DA. One of the following mechanisms can be used to handle the frames with unknown DA. When DLF frame discard is set to ON, the MAC frame with unknown unicast destination address will be discarded. When DLF frame forward is

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

150

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

enabled, the MAC frame with unknown unicast destination address will be sent to all ports in the same VLAN, except the source port.

Broadcast Frames Broadcast frames are forwarded to all ports within the same VLAN except the source port itself.

Multicast Frames Multicast frames are forwarded to all members of the same multicast group within the specified VLAN if VLAN tagged. The untagged multicast frames are tagged with receiving port (FE or GE) PVID or default VLAN ID (if no PVID is defined for the Rx port) and then get forwarded to all the member ports of the same multicast group, which also are members of Rx Port VLAN.

Broadcast Speed Limit ICM3/3G module supports a throttling mechanism to prevent broadcast storms. The throttling mechanism, when enabled, drops incoming frames if they exceed the configured threshold. The threshold can be configured independently for each port at 6% or 20% of port rate.

Rate Limiting ICM3/3G module provides control of ingress as well egress data rate on each port. Rate control can be enabled or disabled independently for each port. Transmit and receive rate can be controlled independently for each port. If no rate control is enabled, full 10/100Mbps rate is permitted. Eight levels of rate configuration are provided for each 10/100Mbps port as shown in the table below. If the receiving traffic is faster than the configured rate, the behavior for excess traffic is defined by the flow control mechanism defined for that port (back pressure in half duplex and pause frame in full duplex mode). In case no flow control mechanism has been defined for a port, the excess frames are dropped. If the transmit traffic is faster than the configured rate, transmission is suspended so that the average transmit traffic is within the defined rate.

Ethernet port configuration supports the following options:

Internal Ethernet Ports External Ethernet Ports Trunk Ports

Internal Ethernet Ports Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Ethernet Port Configuration to open the internal Ethernet ports summary shown in Figure 105. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

151

Figure 105 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Internal Ethernet Ports Window

Select a port in Figure 105 and click Modify to modify the port. Configure the parameters in Figure 106 and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 38 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

152

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 106 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Internal Ethernet Ports Modify Window

Table 38 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Internal Ethernet Ports Table

Parameter Port ID Orientation Incoming Speed Limit Outgoing Speed Limit Broadcast Rate Threshold (pps) Description Value range: Internal1 - 16 Network, Subscriber Value range: Enabled / Disabled Value range: Enabled / Disabled Value range: 0 - 262143 Default: 0, Disabled Multicast Rate Threshold (pps) Value range: 0 - 262143 Default: 0, Disabled DLF Rate Control Threshold (pps) Value range: 0 - 262143 Default: 0, Disabled

External Ethernet Ports Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Ethernet Port Configuration. Click External Ethernet Ports tab to view the external Ethernet ports summary shown in Figure 107. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

153

Figure 107 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - External Ethernet Ports Window

Select a port in Figure 107 and click Modify to modify the port. Configure the parameters in Figure 108 and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 39 for more details. No modification is allowed on trunks ports. Disassociate with trunk port before attempting to modify the parameters.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

154

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 108 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - External Ethernet Ports Modify Window

Table 39 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - External Ethernet Ports Table

Parameter Port ID Administrative State Description Value range: FE1-FE4 or GF1-GE2 Value range: Locked / Unlocked Default: Unlocked Orientation Value range: Network / Subscriber Default: Network Read-only if the port is a member of a trunk group. Speed / Duplex Value range: Auto, 10Mbps/Full, 100Mbps/Full, 10Mbps/Half, 100Mbps/Half Default: Auto Configurable for FE ports only. Read-only if the port is a member of a trunk group.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

155

Table 39 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - External Ethernet Ports Table

Parameter Flow Control Description Value range: On / Off Default: On Incoming Speed Limit Value range:

Disabled / 64kbps to 100Mbps in 64kbps granularity for FE ports Disabled / 64kbps to 1Gbps in 64kbps granularity for GE ports

Default: Disabled Outgoing Speed Limit Value range:

Disabled / 64kbps to 100Mbps in 64kbps granularity for FE ports Disabled / 64kbps to 1Gbps in 64kbps granularity for GE ports

Default: Disabled Broadcast Rate Threshold Value range: 0 - 262143 pps Default: Disabled

Multicast Rate Threshold Value range: 0 - 262143 pps Default: Disabled DLF Rate Control Threshold Value range: 0 - 262143 pps Default: Disabled

Trunk Ports Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Ethernet Port Configuration. Click Trunk Ports tab to view the trunk ports summary shown in Figure 109. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

156

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 109 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Trunk Ports Window

Select a port in Figure 109 and click Modify to modify the port. Configure the parameters in Figure 110 and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 40 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

157

Figure 110 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Trunk Ports - Modify Window

Table 40 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Trunk Ports Table

Parameter Port ID Administrative State Description Value range: Trunk 1 - 3 Value range: Locked / Unlocked Default: Unlocked Orientation Value range: Network / Subscriber Default: Network Speed / Duplex Value range: Auto, or the sum of the member ports' configured speed Default: Auto Read-only Flow Control Value range: On / Off Default: On Read-only
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

158

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 40 ICM3/3G - Ethernet Port Configuration - Trunk Ports Table

Parameter Incoming Speed Limit Description Value range:

Disabled / 64kbps to 100Mbps in 64kbps granularity for FE ports Disabled / 64kbps to 1Gbps in 64kbps granularity for GE ports

Default: Disabled Outgoing Speed Limit Value range:

Disabled / 64kbps to 100Mbps in 64kbps granularity for FE ports Disabled / 64kbps to 1Gbps in 64kbps granularity for GE ports

Default: Disabled Broadcast Rate Threshold (pps) Value range: 0 - 262143 Default: 0, Disabled

Multicast Rate Threshold Value range: 0 - 262143 (pps) Default: 0, Disabled DLF Rate Control Threshold (pps) Value range: 0 - 262143 Default: 0, Disabled

RSTP

The ICM3/3G module supports Spanning Tree Algorithm (SPA) on all bridge ports. Abbreviated STP, a link management protocol part of the IEEE 802.1 standard for media access control bridges. Using the spanning tree algorithm, STP provides path redundancy while preventing undesirable loops in a network that are created by multiple active paths between stations. Loops occur when there are alternate routes between hosts. To establish path redundancy, STP creates a tree that spans all of the switches in an extended network, forcing redundant paths into a standby, or blocked, state. STP allows only one active path at a time between any two network devices (this prevents the loops) but establishes the redundant links as a backup if the initial link should fail. If STP costs change, or if one network segment in the STP becomes unreachable, the spanning tree algorithm reconfigures the spanning tree topology and reestablishes the link by activating the standby path. Without spanning tree in place, it is possible that both connections may be simultaneously live, which could result in an endless loop of traffic on the LAN. Spanning-Tree Protocol operation is transparent to end stations, which are unaware whether they are connected to a single LAN segment or a switched LAN of multiple segments. RSTP Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select RSTP to open Figure 111. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Modify the parameters in Figure 111 and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 41 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

159

Figure 111 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Window

Table 41 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Table

Field Name Spanning Tree Algorithm Priority Description Enable / disable SPA Value range: Enable / Disable The configurable portion of the Bridge ID. The bridge with the lowest bridge ID will be selected as the root. Value range: 0 - 61440 Default: 32768 Bridge Hello Time The interval of time between the transmissions of BPDU frames by a Bridge that is attempting to become the Root or is the Root. The parameter is the interval of time between the transmissions of Topology Changes Notifications BPDUs towards the Root when a topology change has occurred. Value range: 1 to 10 s Default: 2 s Time since topo changed The interval of time since the last change in the topology of the network (basically a link going down or going to forwarding), was detected by a bridge and the event was advertised to the whole bridged network by the root bridge Format: Hours:Minutes: Seconds: Read Only
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

160

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 41 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Table

Field Name Designated Root Description The unique identifier of the bridge in the network designated or assumed to be the root. Read Only Root Port The port closest to the root bridge. The port that provides the least cost from the link to the root is elected as the designated root port. It is not significant when the Bridge is the Root, and is set to zero Read Only Hello Time The current setting of the interval of time between the transmissions of BPDU frames by a Bridge that is attempting to become the Root or is the Root. The current interval of time the between the transmissions of Topology Changes Notifications BPDUs towards the Root when a topology change has occurred. Read Only Bridge Address The Bridge to which the Port belongs, in the case of a Designated Port; or other wise, The bridge believed to be the Designated Bridge for the LAN to which this port is attached. Read Only Bridge Max Age The maximum time a BPDU received on a port is considered valid before it is discarded. Value range: 6 - 40 s Bridge Forward Delay The interval of time a port will be in the Listening and the Learning State before moving to the Learning or Forwarding State, respectively. Value range: 4 - 30 s Number of changes The number of detected topology changes since the last reset of line card. Read Only Root Cost The cumulative cost of all the links to the root bridge. When the bridge is the root the value will be zero Read Only Max Age The current setting of the maximum a time a BPDU received on a port is considered valid before it is discarded. Read Only Forward Delay The current setting of the interval of time a port will be in the Listening and the Learning State before moving to the Learning or Forwarding State, respectively Read Only

RSTP Port At the STP Port, the user is allowed to configure STP port priority and path cost. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select RSTP. Select the RSTP Port tab to open Figure 112. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Modify the parameters in Figure 112 and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 42 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

161

Figure 112 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Port Window

Table 42 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Port Table

Field Name Port ID Description The Port identifier that identifies the port uniquely among the Ports on the Bridge. This parameter is used as the value for Port identifier parameter of all configuration messages transmitted through the Port. Value range: WAN, 1 to 24 with VPI:VCI Path Cost The contribution of the path through this Port, when the Port is the Root Port, to the total cost of the path to the Root for this Bridge. Value range: 1 to 200000000 Designated Root The unique identifier of the bridge in the network designated or assumed to be the root for the LAN to which the port is attached. Read Only Designated Bridge The Bridge to which the Port belongs, in the case of a Designated Port; or other wise, The bridge believed to be the Designated Bridge for the LAN to which this port is attached. Read Only Priority The configurable portion of the Port ID. Determines between two equal cost ports, which one will be selected to be in forwarding mode, putting the other port in blocking.The port with the lowest priority will be selected. Value range: 0 to 240 Default: 128

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

162

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 42 ICM3/3G - RSTP - RSTP Port Table

Field Name STP State Description Displays the current status of the port. The values of the parameters is controlled by the protocol. Value range: Disable Listening Forwarding / Blocking Read Only Designated Cost For the Designated Port, the path cost (equal to the Root Path Cost of the Bridge) offered to the LAN to which the port is attached; otherwise, The cost of the path to the Root offered by the Designated Port on the LAN to which this port is attached. Read Only Designated Port The Port Identifier of the Bridge port, on the Designated Bridge, through which the Designated Bridge transmits the configuration messages stored by this Port Read Only

VLAN

VLAN can be defined as a collection of switch ports within a network, grouped together to enable broadcast traffic reduction as well as provide security. ICM3/3G supports 4092 bridged VLANs and 32 routed VLANs. Both port-based and tag-based VLAN mechanisms are supported in compliance with IEEE 802.1Q.

Port Based VLAN Port-based VLAN is typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and increase security. A group of network users assigned to a VLAN forms a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the ICM3/3G. The frames are forwarded between ports that are members of the same VLAN. The VLAN membership can be defined based on ports, e.g., ports 1, 3, 5, and 7 can be one VLAN and port 2, 4, 6, and 8 could be another.

Untagged Frames If an untagged ingress frame is received on a port, it is assigned a VLAN ID as that of the port PVID. The frame is then forwarded to the destination port, if the VLAN membership criterion is met. The frame will exit the L2 switch tagged/untagged based on the egress rules defined for the destination port. (Egress Packet Untag setting). VLAN ID = PVID for untagged frames Tagged Frames If an ingress frame is received with an 802.1q (known) tag, it is forwarded based on tag and Ingress rules.

Unknown VLAN Tag The ingress frame with unknown VLAN tag can be processed as:

Forwarded - flooding to all the ports Discarded

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

163

Forwarded to GE

Ingress Checking When enabled, the source port ID is compared with the VLAN port membership. If the source port belongs to the same VLAN, the frame is forwarded to the destination port otherwise it is dropped.

Frame Forwarding Flow Chart The following two diagrams depict the flow chart for frame forwarding. It is possible to define default VLAN in the ICM. This flow chart applies to all unicast and multicast traffic flows.

Figure 113 ICM3/3G - VLAN Frame Forwarding with VLAN - Part 1

Incoming Frame from port

No

Is frame tagged (802.1q)

No

Does port have port VLAN ID (PVID)

Yes Yes

Tag the frame (802.1q) with Default VLAN ID (entry[0])

Tag the frame (802.1q) with PVID

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

164

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 114 ICM3/3G - VLAN Frame Forwarding with VLAN - Part 2

B

Found

Lookup 802.1q tag in VLAN table

(Use unknown VLAN tag rule) Not Found

Get index and port membership

No Use source port membership entry [0] (default VLAN)

'Forward to all' option enabled

Yes 'Forward to trunk ports' option enabled Yes Ingress/Egress Check Pass

Members found

'Drop' Option enabled Follow port membership to forward Yes

No Yes Is untagging enabled on the destination port No

Untag the frame No

Frame forwarded

Drop the frame

Send the frame to all the ports

ICM3/3G module supports the following VLAN configuration:

General (Master shelf ICM3/3G only) VLAN Setup Routed VLAN Interface

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

165

General This feature is applicable for single shelf ICM3/3G module or master shelf ICM3/3G module only. ICM3/3G supports double VLAN tagging (Q-in-Q) based transparent LAN service on a per module basis. When enabled, all existing layer 2 (except bridged in-band management VLAN-s), layer 3 and ACL configurations are purged. Other configurations, including management VLANs, are not affected. Similarly, when disabled, all existing layer 2 (except bridged in-band management VLAN-s) and ACL related configurations are purged. ICM3/3G allows TPID configuration for service provider VLANs. If the TPID received on a network oriented interfaces does not match the configured TPID of the service provider VLANs, the Ethernet packet is considered without a service provider tag and is silently discarded. Subscriber isolation is supported on a per module basis. Subscriber isolation prevents switching between two subscriber interfaces. When enabled, frames received from a subscriber port that are destined for other subscriber port(s) are silently discarded. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select VLAN to open Figure 116. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take modification into effect. Refer to Table 43 for more details.

Figure 115 ICM3G - VLAN - General Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

166

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 116 ICM3 - VLAN - General Window

Table 43 ICM3/3G - VLAN - General Table

Field Q-in-Q Setup Double Tagging Enable/disable VLAN tagging (Q-in-Q) based transparent LAN service. The ICM3/3G module is reset when tagging mode is changed. Value range: Enabled/Disabled Default: Disabled TPID TPID for the service provider VLAN. Value range: 16-bit hexadecimal Default: 8100 Subscriber Isolation Setup Subscriber Isolation To enable/disable silently discarding frames received from a subscriber port that are destined for other subscriber port(s). Value range: Enabled/Disabled Default: Disabled Description

After entered double tagging mode, the ICM3/3G sub tree in the left panel is restructured. The following configuration options are removed:

Layer 3 related configuration (i.e. VLAN Interface, RIP, OSPF, ARP etc.)

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

167

Multicasting configuration (IGMP and PIM-SM) DHCP

VLAN Setup Each VLAN interface can be associated with multiple Ethernet interfaces. Traffic between different Ethernet interfaces of the same VLAN interface is locally switched and is bypassing the router. Therefore, network oriented and subscriber oriented Ethernet interfaces can not be associated to the same VLAN interface. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select VLAN. Click VLAN Setup to open Figure 118. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 44 for more details.

Figure 117 ICM3G - VLAN - VLAN Setup Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

168

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 118 ICM3 - VLAN - VLAN Setup Window

Table 44 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Setup Table

Parameter Unknown VLAN Ingress Check Description Value range: Discard / Forward When enabled, the source port ID is compared with the VLAN port membership. If the source port belongs to the same VLAN, the frame is forwarded to the destination port otherwise it is dropped. Value range: Enabled / Disabled Default: Enabled VLAN ID VLAN Name Mode Value Range: 2-4092 A character string with maximum of 20 characters Value Range:

Single tagging mode: Full Bridging / Limited Bridging / Routing Double tagging mode: Full Bridging / Limited Bridging

Default: Full Bridging Up to 8 VLANs can have limited bridging mode. Up to 32 VLANs can be set to routing mode Orientation This is only applicable to a routed VLAN. The orientation is inherited from the first associated interface. The orientation is unknown when no interface is associated with the routed VLAN. Default VLAN is always subscriber oriented. Value range: Network / Subscriber / Unknown (for routed VLANs) / None (for bridged VLANs) Default:

Unknown for routed VLANs None for bridged VLANs.

Read-only
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

169

Table 44 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Setup Table

Parameter 802.1 Priority Tagged Port Untagged Port Description The actual IEEE 802.1 priority for double tagging. Not applicable for single tagging mode. List of tagged ports for this VLAN List of untagged ports for this VLAN

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 118. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 119. Note: When double tagging mode is enabled, the Add and Modify option has the following changes:

All network oriented bridge ports act as Tagged Ports for Service Provider VLAN All subscriber oriented bridge ports act as Untagged Ports for Service Provider VLAN Routing mode is not available (only Full & Limited Bridging will be available)

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

170

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 119 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Setup - Add Window

A VLAN can not be deleted if it is associated with any ports. Use Modify to remove all tagged and untagged ports. Select an entry and click Delete in Figure 118 to remove the entry. Routed VLAN Interface A Routed VLAN interface in consisted of the VLAN/IP address combination. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select VLAN. Select the Routed VLAN Interface/ VLAN Interface tab to open Figure 121. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

171

Figure 120 ICM3G - VLAN - VLAN Interface Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

172

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 121 ICM3 - VLAN - Routed VLAN Interface Window

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 121. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 122. Refer to Table 45 for more details. Figure 122 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Interface - Add Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

173

Table 45 ICM3/3G - VLAN - VLAN Interface - Add Table

Parameter VLAN ID Orientation Description Value Range: 2-4092 This is only applicable to a routed VLAN. The orientation is inherited from the first associated interface. The orientation is unknown when no interface is associated with the routed VLAN. Default VLAN is always subscriber oriented. Value range: Network / Subscriber / Unknown (for routed VLANs) / None (for bridged VLANs) Default:

Unknown for routed VLANs None for bridged VLANs.

Read-only Sub-Interface ID Sub-interface 1 is the primary interface Read-only IP Address Subnet Mask Valid range: valid IP address Valid range: valid subnet mask

Select an entry and click Delete in Figure 121 to remove an entry. In-band Management VLAN can be added/removed to In-band management access list through command line interface (CLI), or through Device manager for ICM3 module, but for ICM3G only through command line interface (CLI). Follow the procedures below to configure in-band management:

Create a VLAN (through device manager or CLI). Use the following CLI command to add the VLAN to in-band management access list (through CLI only): AN2000_IB#access in-band vid <2-4092> address <A.B.C.D> netmask <A.B.C.D> AN2000_IB#access in-band vid <2-4092> mode <master|slave1|slave2>

Modify tagged port or untagged port for the in-band management VLAN (through device manager or CLI) Remove all the tagged and untagged ports before remove the selected VLAN (through device manager or CLI). Use the following command to remove VLAN from in-band management access list (through CLI only): AN2000_IB#access no in-band vid <all|2-4092>

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

174

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Note: Refer to iAN8K B1000 CLI User Manual UTSI-NJTC-20050624 for more details on CLI configuration. Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and select VLAN. Select the Inband VLAN Interfaces tab to open Figure 123. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 123 ICM3 - VLAN - Inband VLAN Interfaces Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

175

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 123. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 124. Refer to Table 45 for more details. Figure 124 ICM3 - VLAN - Inband VLAN Interfaces - Add VLAN Interface Window

Table 46 ICM3 - VLAN -Inband VLAN Interface - Add Table

Parameter VLAN ID Sub-Interface ID Description Value Range: 2-4092 Sub-interface 1 is the primary interface Read-only IP Address Subnet Mask Valid range: valid IP address Valid range: valid subnet mask

Select an entry and click Delete in Figure 123 to remove an entry. Multicast The IP DSLAM can be configured as a layer 2 or layer 3 device. Running the IP DSLAM at layer 2 with IGMP Snooping is the most straightforward configuration for video delivery. IGMP Snooping allows the IP DSLAM to track active video channels and only forward video streams to the viewing subscribers and therefore reduces unnecessary flooding of IP multicast traffic. When layer 3 routing, the DSL subscribers are no longer directly connected to the upstream multicast router at the network layer. This presents a problem for IGMP since IGMP only works with multicast routers and hosts in the same broadcast domain. To overcome this problem, IGMP Proxy can be used the route the two multicast domain together while providing the same benefits of IGMP Snooping.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

176

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

In some networks, the video source is located several network hops away from the IP DSLAM. In such cases, PIM-SM can be used to propagate IGMP Joins to the RP multicast router and route multicast video streams towards the video subscriber in a bandwidth efficient manner. IP DSLAM also supports IGMP Report Aggregation to minimize the number of unnecessary IGMP multicast sent to the upstream router. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Multicast to open Figure 126. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 125 ICM3G- Multicast Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

177

Figure 126 ICM3 - Multicast Window

Modify the parameters and click Apply in Figure 126 to bring the modification into effect. ICM3/3G module supports the following configuration for multicast

IGMP Snooping

General Group Membership

IGMP Proxy

General Group Membership

PIM-SM (Master shelf ICM3 only)

General RP Router Multicast Routing Table Neighbor Details Interface Setup

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

178

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

IGMP Snooping

General Group Membership

General Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast. Select IGMP Snooping to open Figure 127. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 47 for more details. Figure 127 ICM3 - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - General Window

Table 47 ICM3/3G - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - General Table

Field Name IGMP Snooping Unknown Group No-response-leave query count
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Description Read-only. Value range: Forward / Discard Value range: 1-3

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

179

Table 47 ICM3/3G - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - General Table

Field Name No-response-leave query interval Last query count Last query interval Multicast Router Mode Multicast Router Interface Description Value range: 1-255 Value range: 0-3 Value range: 1-255 Value range: Auto / Manual Value range: FE1-4 / GE1-2 / Trunk1-3

Group Membership Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast. Select IGMP Snooping and click Group Membership tab to open Figure 127. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 48 for more details. Figure 128 ICM3 - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - Group Membership Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

180

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 48 ICM3/3G - Multicast - IGMP Snooping - Group Membership Table

Field Name Group Address VLAN ID Port List Description IP Address 2-4092 List of interfaces that are members of the given multicast group.

IGMP Proxy

General Group Membership

General Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast. Select IGMP Proxy to open Figure 129. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 49 for more details. Figure 129 ICM3 - Multicast - IGMP Proxy - General Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

181

Table 49 ICM3/3G - Multicast - IGMP Proxy - General Table

Field Name IGMP Proxy No-response-leave query count No-response-leave query interval Last query count Last query interval Multicast Router Mode Multicast Router Interface Description Read-only. Value range: 1-3 Value range: 1-255 Value range: 0-3 Value range: 1-255 Value range: Auto / Manual Value range: None

Group Membership Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast. Select IGMP Proxy and click Group Membership tab to open Figure 130. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 130 ICM3 - Multicast - IGMP Proxy - Group Membership

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

182

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

PIM-SM This feature is applicable for single shelf ICM3 module or master shelf ICM3 module only. ICM3 module supports the following PIM-SM configuration:

General RP Router Multicast Routing Table Neighbor Details Interface Setup

General Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast. Select PIM-SM to open Figure 131. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

183

Figure 131 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - General Window

RP Router Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast. Select PIM-SM and click RP Router tab to open Figure 132. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

184

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 132 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - RP Router Window

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 132. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 133 to bring the modification into effect. Only one RP router is allowed. Figure 133 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - RP Router - Add Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

185

Select an entry and click Modify in Figure 132. Configure the parameter to 0.0.0.0 to disable the router. Multicast Routing Table Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast. Select PIM-SM and click Multicast Routing Table tab to open Figure 134. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 134 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - Multicast Routing Table Window

Neighbor Details Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast Select PIM-SM and click Neighbor Details tab to open Figure 135. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

186

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 135 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - Neighbor Details Window

Interface Setup Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and expand Multicast Select PIM-SM and click Interface Setup tab to open Figure 136. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

187

Figure 136 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - Interface Setup Window

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 136. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 137 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

188

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 137 ICM3 - Multicast - PIM-SM - Interface Setup - Add Window

Select an entry in Figure 132 and click Delete to remove the entry. Routing This feature is applicable for single shelf ICM3 module or master shelf ICM3 module only. This section provides configuration for subscriber data route only. Please refer to Chapter 7 for more details on management data route configuration. ICM3 module supports 8000 entries in data traffic routing table. The default route is indicated by a destination IP address of 0.0.0.0 with the subnet mask of 0.0.0.0. Only ONE default route can be set in the system to be used for both management and data traffic. This shall be kept in mind when planning and provisioning a default route in the network. Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and select Routing to open Figure 138. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 50 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

189

Figure 138 ICM3 - Routing - Routing Table Window

Table 50 ICM3 - Routing - Routing Table Field Descriptions

Parameter Number Type Destination Subnet Mask Gateway Interface Metric Administrative Distance Value Range Value range: 1 - 8000 Value range: RIP / OSPF / Static / Connected / Subnet Value range: valid IP address Value range: valid subnet mask Value range: valid IP address VLAN Interface name Not applicable to static routes. Route preference value. Configurable for static routes. Read-only for dynamic routes. 0 for connected interface routes. 1 for all other static routes Value range: 0 - 255

Click Add in Figure 138. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 139 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

190

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 139 ICM3 - Routing - Add

Select an entry in Figure 138 and click Delete to remove the entry. The ICM3 module supports the following routing configuration options:

RIP

General Redistribution Setup Neighbor Setup Peer Details Key Setup Interface Setup

OSPF

General Route Redistribution Area Setup Address Ranges LSDB Table Neighbor Details Interface Setup

ARP

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

191

RIP This feature is applicable for single shelf ICM3 module or master shelf ICM3 module only. RIP supports network oriented VLAN interfaces and the ICM3 modules supports RIP-1, RIP-1 compatibility and RIP-2 modes. Refer to the following section for more details:

General Redistribution Setup Neighbor Setup Peer Details Key Setup Interface Setup

General Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select RIP to open Figure 140. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 51 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

192

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 140 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - General Window

Table 51 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - General Table

Field Route Changes Description The number of route changes made to the routing database by RIP excluding the refresh of a route's age. Value range: 32-bit integer Queries Received The number of responses sent to RIP queries Value range: 32-bit integer

Redistribution Setup Maximum of 3 types of routes could be imported into RIP domain. Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select RIP and click Redistribution Setup tab to open Figure 141. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 52 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

193

Figure 141 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Redistribution Setup Window

Table 52 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Redistribution Setup Table

Field Protocol Description Redistributing any combination of connected, static and OSPF routes into RIP domain is allowed. Routing entries from other protocols exist 120 seconds after the source is removed from the redistribution list. Value range: Connected / Static / OSPF / None (None: disable redistribution of non-RIP routes) Metric RIP metric Value range: 0 - 16

Click Add in Figure 141 or select an entry and click Modify to modify. Configure the parameters in Figure 142 and click Apply to take the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

194

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 142 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Redistribution Setup - Add Window

Neighbor Setup Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select RIP and click Neighbor Details tab to open Figure 143. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 53 for more details. Figure 143 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Neighbor Details Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

195

Table 53 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Neighbor Details Table

Field Serial Number Neighbor Address Description Neighbor ID number Maximum of 16 RIP neighbors can be configured. The RIP neighbor IP address must be in the same subnet of the network VLAN interface.

Click Add in Figure 143 to create a new entry. Configure the parameters in Figure 144 and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Figure 144 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Neighbor Details - Add Window

Peer Details Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select RIP and click Peer Details tab to open Figure 145. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 54 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

196

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 145 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Peer Details Window

Table 54 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Peer Details Table

Field Peer Address Version Bad Packets Count Bad Routes Count Last Update Description Peer address Version number The number of bad packets The number of bad routes The time of last update

Key Setup ICM3 randomly select keys from the keychain for plain text and MD5 authentication for RIP authentication. Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select RIP and click Key Setup tab to open Figure 146. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 55 for more details.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

197

Figure 146 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Key Setup Window

Table 55 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Key Setup Table

Field Keychain Setup Serial Number Keychain ID number Maximum of 6 keychains Keychain Key Setup Key Index Key ID number Maximum of 255 keys Key Key name Keychain name Description

Click Add in the Keychain Setup section of Figure 146 to create a new keychain. Or select a keychain and click Modify to modify the name. Configure the parameters in Figure 147 and click Apply to take the modification into effect.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

198

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 147 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Key Setup - Add Keychain Window

Select a keychain in the Keychain Setup section and the corresponding keys are then listed in the Key Setup section. Click Add in the Key Setup section of Figure 146 to create a new key. Or select a key and click Modify to modify the name. Configure the parameters in Figure 148 and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Figure 148 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Key Setup - Add Key Window

Interface Setup Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select RIP and click Interface Setup tab to open Figure 149. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 56 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

199

Figure 149 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Interface Setup Window

Table 56 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Interface Setup Table

Field VLAN Interface Description Available VLAN interface

Authentication Type Value range: Plain Text / MD5 Default: Plain Text Keychain Only applicable to network oriented routed VLAN interfaces. Value range: None / Key1-6 (previously created) Default: None Mode Enables or disables the RIP module from transmitting/receiving updates on the VLAN interface. Only applicable to network oriented routed VLAN interfaces. Value range: Active / Passive Default: Active

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

200

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 56 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Interface Setup Table

Field Transmit Version Description Controls the version of update packets transmitted by the RIP module on the VLAN interface. Only applicable to network oriented routed VLAN interfaces. Value range: Disable Transmit / v1 / v1-compatible / V2 Default: v1-compatible Receive Version Controls the version of update packets accepted by the RIP module on the VLAN interface. Only applicable to network oriented routed VLAN interfaces. Value range: v1 / v2 / v1-v2 / Disable Receive Default: v1-v2 Split Horizon Enables or disables split horizon. Poisoned-Reverse instructs the RIP module whether or not to transmit update packets on the interface using split horizon with poison reverse.Only applicable to network oriented routed VLAN interfaces Value range: Disabled / Simple / Poisoned-Reverse Default: Poisoned-Reverse

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 149. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 150 to bring the modification into effect. Figure 150 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Interface Setup - Add Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

201

Select an entry in Figure 149 and click Delete to remove the entry. OSPF This feature is applicable for single shelf ICM3 module or master shelf ICM3 module only. OSPF supports network oriented VLAN interfaces and also a link-state database that can store up to 8000 LSAs. Refer to the following sections for more details:

General Route Redistribution Area Setup Address Ranges LSDB Table Neighbor Details Interface Setup

General Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select OSPF to open Figure 151. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameter and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 57 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

202

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 151 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - General Window

Table 57 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - General Table

Field Name OSPF Routing Router ID SPF Delay Description Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: valid IP address The SPF schedule delay time in seconds. Value range: 0 - 2147483647 SPF Holdtime The hold time between SPFs in seconds. Value range: 0 - 2147483647 Area Border Router AS Border Router Value range: Yes / No Value range: Yes / No

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

203

Table 57 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - General Table

Field Name Default Information Originate Description Enable / disable generating a default external route into an OSPF routing domain. Value range: Disable / Enable / Always (Always: advertises the default route regardless of whether the software has a default route) Metric Metric used for generating the default route Value range: 1 - 16777214 Metric Type External link type associated with the default route advertised into the OSPF routing domain Value range: Type 1 / Type 2 Number of Areas The number of OSPF areas configured. Value range: 32-bit integer Total LSAs Originated Total LSAs Received The total number of LSA originated The total number of LSA received

Route Redistribution Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select OSPF and click Route Redistribution to open Figure 152. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameter and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 58 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

204

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 152 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Route Redistribution Window

Table 58 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Route Redistribution Table

Field Name Protocol Description To redistribute any combination of connected, static and RIP routes into OSPF domain. Value range: Connected / Static / RIP / None (None: disable redistribution of non-OSPF routes. Connected routes is redistributes as external to the autonomous system) Metric Metric used for generating the default route Value range: 1 - 16777214 Metric Type External link type associated with the default route advertised into the OSPF routing domain Value range: Type 1 / Type 2

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 152. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 153 to bring the modification into effect.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

205

Figure 153 ICM3 - Routing - RIP - Route Redistribution- Add Window

Area Setup Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select OSPF and click Area Setup tab to open Figure 154. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 59 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

206

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 154 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Area Setup Window

Table 59 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Area Setup Table

Field Area ID Description ID number in w.x.y.z format. Maximum of 4 areas can be configured. Area Type Value range: Plain / Stub NSSA Default: Stun Summary LSA Allow importing of OSPF summary LSAs. Only applicable to stub and NSSA area types. Value range: Enabled / disabled Default: Enabled Status Value range: Default: SPF Run ABR Count The number of times that the intra-area route table has been calculated using this area's link-state database. Area Border Router Count. The total number of area border routers reachable within this area.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

207

Table 59 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Area Setup Table

Field ASBR Count LSA Count LSA Checksum Default Cost Description Area Border Router Count. The total number of AS border routers reachable within this area. The number of LSAs in this area. The sum of LSA checksums. Cost of default route sent into OSPF stub and NSSA area. Only applicable to ABR attached to a stub or NSSA. Value range: 1 - 16777215 Default: 1 No-Redistribution Used to block redistribution of imported routes to NSSA when the router is an NSSA ABR. Redistribution of imported routes to normal areas are not affected by this setting. Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Enable Default Information Originate Generate of type 7 default route into OSPF domain. Only applicable to NSSA area type. Value range: Enable / Disable Default: Disable

Click Add in Figure 154 or select an entry and click Modify. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 155 to bring the modification into effect. Figure 155 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Area Setup - Add Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

208

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Select an entry in Figure 154 and click Delete to remove the entry. Address Ranges Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select OSPF and click Address Ranges tab to open Figure 156. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 60 for more details. Figure 156 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Address Ranges Window

Table 60 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Address Ranges Table

Field Area ID Address Description ID number in w.x.y.z format Common IP address prefix of the summarized networks. This is only applicable when the ICM3 is the ABR or ASBR. Up to 64 ranges can be specified for an area.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

209

Table 60 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Address Ranges Table

Field Mask Type Advertize Description Subnet mask for the IP address Value range: Router(1) / Network(2) / Network-Summary(3) / ASBR-Summary (4) / AS-External(5) / NSSA-External(7) True: advertise generates a Type 3 summary LSA based on the IP address range. False: not-advertise suppresses the Type 3 summary LSA specified by the address range and the component networks remain hidden from other networks.

Select an area ID. Click Add in Figure 156 or select an entry and click Modify. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 157 to bring the modification into effect. Figure 157 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Address Ranges - Add Window

Select an entry in Figure 156 and click Delete to remove the entry. LSDB Table LSDB tables supports 8000 entries. Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select OSPF and click LSDB Table tab to open Figure 158. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 61 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

210

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 158 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - LSDB Table Window

Table 61 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - LSDB Table

Field Area ID Description Type of the area Value range: All / Internal / External / previously created Area ID Area LSA Count Area LSA Checksum Area ID LS Type Link State ID Advertising Router LS Sequence Number LS Age LS Checksum The number of LSAs in this area. The sum of LSA checksums. Area ID in w.x.y.z format Value range: Router / Network / Network-Summary / ASBR-Summary / AS-External / NSSA-External Value range: valid IP address Value range: valid IP address Value range: Hexadecimal LS age in seconds Value range: Hexadecimal

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

211

Select an area ID type to display all, internal or external area. Highlight a specific entry to display detailed information. Depending on the LS type of the entry, different information are displayed: Table 62 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - LSDB Table - LS Type Table
Field LS Type is Router: Router Type Number of Links AS Boundary Router, Area Border Router, Endpoint Active Virtual Link, Internal Router Number of individual links inside this link state record Value range: 16-bit integer Network / Subnet Point to Point: router ID of the neighboring router. Transit Network: IP address of designated router interface to the network. Stub Network: IP address of network or subnet. Virtual Link: router ID of the virtual link neighbor. Value range: IP address Network Mask Link Connection Value range: IP address Connection offered by the router interface. Value range: Point to Point /Transit Network / Sub Area / Virtual Link LS Type is Network: Network Mask The mask for the network to which the designated router is attached. Value range: IP address Attached Routers Read-only. Router ID for all routers attached to the network adjacent with the designated router. Value range: IP address LS Type is Network-Summary or ASBR-Summary: Network Mask Mask for the summarized network. Value range: IP address Metric Cost of reaching the summary network/ASBR from the advertising router/ASBR. Value range: 16-bit integer LS Type is AS-External or NSSA-External: Network Mask Mask for the network. Value range: IP address Metric Type OSPF type 1 or type 2 network. Value range: 1 / 2 Description

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

212

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 62 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - LSDB Table - LS Type Table

Field Metric Description Cost of reaching the external network from the advertising router (ASBR). Value range: 16-bit integer Forwarding Address Address to which packets for the advertised external network must be sent. Value range: IP address External Route Tag Tag that can be applied to a route by the protocol from which it originates. Value range: Decimal number

Neighbor Details Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select OSPF and click Neighbor Details tab to open Figure 159. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 63 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

213

Figure 159 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Neighbor Details Window

Table 63 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Neighbor Details Table

Field Neighbor Address Router ID Priority Description Neighbor IP address Neighbor router IP address The priority assigned to the neighbor router Value range: 0 - 255

Interface Setup Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select OSPF and click Interface Setup tab to open Figure 160. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

214

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 160 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Interface Setup Window

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 160. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 161 to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 64 for more details. Configure the VALN priority to 0 to prevent the ICM3 from becoming the Designated Router or the Backup Designated Router.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

215

Figure 161 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Interface Setup - Add Window

Table 64 ICM3 - Routing - OSPF - Interface Setup Table

Field VLAN Interface Area ID Cost Priority Description Available VLAN interface Area ID in w.x.y.x format Value range: 1 - 65535 Value range: 0 - 255 Default: 1 Authenticate Enable / disable plain text authentication Value range: None / Text Default: None Password Used for plain text authentication. Only applicable to network oriented routed VLAN interfaces. The password is displayed as "********" regardless of the password length. The password is displayed in CLI. Value range: 1 - 3600 seconds Default: 1 s Retransmit Delay Value range: 1 - 3600 seconds Default: 5 s Hello Interval Value range: 1 - 65535 seconds Default: 10 Dead Interval Value range: 1 - 65535 seconds Default: 40

Transmit Delay

Select an entry in Figure 160 and click Delete to remove the entry.
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

216

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

ARP This feature is applicable for single shelf ICM3 module or master shelf ICM3 module only. ICM3 module learns ARP entries from the received ARP request messages. IP DSLAM ensures that any IP traffic originated from the DSL subscriber only appears on one and only one subscriber Ethernet interface. Hence, the ICM3 module can correctly discover and associate the subscriber IP address with the Ethernet interface and insert a route entry into the routing table without static configuration or the aid of complex dynamic routing protocols ICM3 sends ARP requests when it needs to:

resolve correct mapping between an IP address and MAC address a complete ARP entry times out ARP response timeout for incomplete ARP entries.

A complete ARP cache entry is one that has complete MAC and IP address mapping. Timeout triggers new address resolution (confirmation) attempt. If the attempt succeeds, the timer restarts. If it fails, the entry will not be used for forwarding and the user shall see the entry as incomplete. The timeout for new incomplete dynamic ARP entries during address resolution for is three times of the retransmission timeout. After timeout the entry is not used for forwarding and it is displayed as incomplete. An incomplete ARP cache entry is one that does not have full MAC address information. Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and expand Routing. Select ARP to open Figure 162. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 65 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

217

Figure 162 ICM3 - Routing - ARP Window

Table 65 ICM3 - Routing - ARP Field Description

Field Complete Entry Timeout Description Valid range: 0 - 30 minutes 0: disable Default: 20 minutes Retransmission Timeout Valid range: 1 - 30 seconds Default: 1 second VLAN ID Ethernet Port MAC Address IP Address Type VLAN ID number Ethernet Port ID The MAC address of a subscriber. The IP address of a subscriber. Value range: Dynamic / Static Static ARP entries remains in the table until manually deleted by the operator.

Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 162 to bring the modification into effect. When the Complete Entry Timeout or the Retransmission Timeout is modified, the new timers do not effect the existing ARP entries. Those existing
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

218

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

entries continue to use the previous timer value until the complete entry timer expires. Then when the ICM3 refreshes those entries, the new timer is used for these entries. Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 162. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 163 to bring the modification into effect. Figure 163 ICM3 - Routing - ARP - Add Window

Select an entry in Figure 162 and click Delete to remove the entry. Or click Delete Advanced to delete entries with the same criteria in Figure 164. Figure 164 ICM3 - Routing - ARP - Delete Advanced Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

219

DHCP

This feature is applicable for single shelf ICM3/3G module or master shelf ICM3/3G module only. ICM3/3G supports DHCP relay function for routed DHCP packets. The DHCP relay agent relays DHCP packets with DHCP option 82 present. Note: DHCP function is upgraded to support routed layer 3 VLANs in Release 3.1. All layer 2 bridged VLAN DHCP configurations from previous releases become invalid and are removed during the software upgrade. User must configure the DHCP parameters to recreate DHCP interface. ICM3/3G module supports the following configuration for DHCP:

Server Profile Subnet Mapping Pool Map Lease Option 60 Option 82 VLAN

Server Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP to open Figure 165. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 66 for more details. Note: After any changes are made for DHCP server or DHCP relay, the DHCP server must be disabled and then re-enabled for the modification to take effect. Note: The DHCP server must always be enabled in order for management communication between ICM3/3G module and line modules to occur, except when it is momentarily disabled then re-enabled as noted above.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

220

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 165 ICM3 - DHCP - Server Window

Table 66 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Server Field Description

Parameter DHCP Service Timeout Description Enable / disable DHCP server and relay functions at the module level. This counter parameter sets the number of times the DHCP server pings an address before it determines that the address is not in use. Value range: 1-10 Default: 2 Interval (ms) This parameter specifies the time frame the DHCP server waits for each ping reply. The interval value is specified in milliseconds. Value range: 100-10000 ms Default: 500 ms

Profile Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP. Click the Profiles tab to open Figure 166. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

221

Figure 166 ICM3 - DHCP - Profile Window

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 166. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 167 to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 67 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

222

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 167 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Profile - Add Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

223

Table 67 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Profile - Add Table

Parameter Profile name Default Lease Time Field Description A character string with maximum of 20 characters Value range: up to 49170 days Default: 86400 seconds (1 day) Maximum Lease Time Value range: up to 49170 days Default: 172800 seconds (2 day) Subnet Mask Time Offset Host Name Boot File Size Merit Dump File Domain Name Swap Server Root Path IP Forwarding Non-local Source Routing Default IP TTL Path MTU Aging Timeout Interface MTU All Submits Are Local Broadcast Address Perform Mask Discovery Mask Supplier Perform Router Discovery Router Solicitation Address Static Routes Trailer Encapsulation ARP Cache Timeout Ethernet Encapsulation TCP Default TTL TCP Keepalive Interval TCP Keepalive Garbage Network Information Service Domain NetBIOS over TCP/IP Node Type NetBIOS over TCP/IP Scope TFTP Server Name Value range: valid IP address Value range: 32-bit integer Value range: character string with maximum of 256 characters Value range: 0 - 65535 Value range: character string with maximum of 64 characters Value range: character string with maximum of 256 characters Value range: valid IP address Value range: character string with maximum of 128 characters Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: 1 - 255 Value range: 0 - 4294967295 seconds Value range: 0 65536 Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: valid IP address Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: valid IP address Value range: maximum of 4 destination/router address pairs Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: 0 - 4294967295 seconds Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: 1 - 255 Value range: 0 - 4294967295 seconds Value range: Enable / Disable Value range: character string with maximum of 256 characters Value range: None / B-node / P-node / M-node / H-node Value range: character string with maximum of 64 characters. Value range: character string with maximum of 64 characters
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

224

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 67 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Profile - Add Table

Parameter Bootfile Name Vendor Specific Information Router IP Addresses Time Servers Name Servers Domain Name Servers Log Servers Cookie Servers LPR Servers Impress Servers Resource Location Servers Network Information Servers Network Time Protocol Servers NetBios Name Servers Addresses X Font Servers X Display Managers Path MTU Plateau Table Field Description Value range: character string with maximum of 128 characters Value range: character string with maximum of 64 characters Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 4 IP addresses Maximum of 9 entries Value range: 68 - 65535 Static Route Destination Static Route Address Policy Filter Address Policy Filter Netmask Maximum of 4 static route pairs Maximum of 4 static route pairs Maximum of 4 policy filter pairs Maximum of 4 policy filter pairs

Select an entry in Figure 166 and click Delete to remove the entry. Or click Delete All to remove all entries. Subnet Mapping Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP. Click the Subnet Mapping tab to open Figure 168. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

225

Figure 168 ICM3 - DHCP - Subnet Mapping Window

Click Add in Figure 168. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 169 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

226

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 169 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Subnet Mapping - Add Window

Select an entry in Figure 168 and click Delete to remove the entry. Or click Delete All to remove all entries. Pool Address pools are automatically assigned to a routed VLAN interface based on the VLAN interface subnet. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP. Click the Pool tab to open Figure 170. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

227

Figure 170 ICM3 - DHCP - Pool Window

Click Add in Figure 170. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 171 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

228

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 171 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Pool - Add Window

Select an entry in Figure 170 and click Delete to remove the entry. Or click Delete All to remove all entries. Map Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP. Click the Map tab to open Figure 172. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

229

Figure 172 ICM3 - DHCP - Map Window

Click Add in Figure 172. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 173 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

230

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 173 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Map - Add Window

Select an entry in Figure 172 and click Delete to remove the entry. Lease Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP. Click Lease tab to open Figure 174. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

231

Figure 174 ICM3 - DHCP - Lease Window

Select an entry in Figure 174 and click Validate Selection to validate the entry. Or click Validate All to remove all entries. Option 60 DHCP server selects the corresponding DHCP profile and address scope based on option 60 filter. The DHCP profile selected via option 60 takes precedence over DHCP profile selected via IP subnet. However, the DHCP profile selected via option 82 takes precedence over DHCP profile selected via option 60. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP. Click Option 60 tab to open Figure 175. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

232

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 175 ICM3 - DHCP - Option 60 Window

Click Add in Figure 175 or select an entry and click Modify. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 176 to bring the modification into effect. Figure 176 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Option 60 - Add Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

233

Option 82 DHCP server selects the corresponding DHCP profile and address scope based on option 82 filter. Up to 16 option 82 filters are supported. The DHCP profile selected via option 82 takes precedence over DHCP profile selected via option 60. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP. Click Option 82 tab to open Figure 177. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 177 ICM3 - DHCP - Option 82 Window

Click Add in Figure 177 or select an entry and click Modify. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 178 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

234

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 178 ICM3/3G - DHCP - Option 82 - Add Window

VLAN ICM3/3G supports 2 DHCP relay server per route/subscriber VLAN. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select DHCP. Click the VLAN tab to open Figure 179. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

235

Figure 179 ICM3 - DHCP - VLAN Window

Select an entry and click Modify in Figure 179. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 180 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

236

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 180 ICM3/3G - DHCP - VLAN - Modify Window

Packet Classification

This feature is applicable for single shelf ICM3/3G module or master shelf ICM3/3G module only. Classification is the basis for flow-based packet processing. Classification can be used for ACL to drop un-wanted packets, packet priority to set internal priority or change 802.1p/DSCP, rate metering or packet mirroring. ICM3/3G supports ACL configuration per port and also supports support 10 classification masks and 80 rules shared by all external and internal ports. The packet is forwarded if there is no match found in any configured ACLs. ICM3/3G module supports the following configuration or packet classification:

Masks Actions Meters Flow Counters Rules

Masks IP DSLAM supports 10 ACL masks based on a combination of packet fields. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Packet Classification to open Figure 181. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

237

Figure 181 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Masks Window

Click Add in Figure 181. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 182. The mask can be any combination of the options with the exception listed in Table 68. Refer to Table 68 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

238

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 182 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Masks - Add Window

Table 68 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Masks - Add Field Description

Field Priority Description Determines which field to be filtered first. 10 has the highest priority Value range: 1-10 Name Source MAC address A character string up to 20 characters The 48 wildcard bits identify the bits to ignore in the source address. Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Destination IP The 32 wildcard bits identify the bits to ignore in the source address. Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Destination MAC address The 48 wildcard bits identify the bits to ignore in the source address. Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Ethernet Type Source IP Filtering based on ethernet type The 32 wildcard bits identify the bits to ignore in the source address. Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

239

Table 68 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Masks - Add Field Description

Field Destination IP Description The 32 wildcard bits identify the bits to ignore in the destination address. Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 IP Protocol Type Source TCP port Source UDP port Destination TCP port Destination UDP port VLAN ID 802.1p TOS Precedence Bits Not applicable if any of the following fields are selected: Source TCP, Source UDP port, Destination TCP, Destination UDP, TCP ACK, TCP SYN, TCP FIN Not applicable if any of the following fields are selected: IP protocol type, Source UDP, Destination UDP. Not applicable if any of the following fields are selected: IP protocol type, Source TCP, Destination TCP, TCP ACK, TCP SYN, TCP FIN. Not applicable if any of the following fields are selected: IP protocol type, Source UDP, Destination UDP. Not applicable if any of the following fields are selected: IP protocol type, Source TCP, Destination TCP, TCP ACK, TCP SYN, TCP FIN. Filtering based on VLAN ID Filtering based on 802.1p IP Type of Service precedence bits. Not applicable if DSCP is selected. TOS Bits IP Type of Service bits. Not applicable DSCP is selected. DSCP Egress Port TCP ACK TCP SYN TCP FIN Not applicable if TOS Precedence Bits or TOS Bits is selected. Filtering based on egress port Not applicable if any of the following fields are selected: IP protocol type, Source UDP, Destination UDP. Not applicable if any of the following fields are selected: IP protocol type, Source UDP, Destination UDP. Not applicable if any of the following fields are selected: IP protocol type, Source UDP, Destination UDP.

Select an entry in Figure 181 and click Delete to remove the entry. A mask cannot be removed if theres rules associated with it. Delete the rules associated with the selected mask first. Actions ICM3/3G modules supports up to 8 combined actions for each ACL. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Packet Classification. Click the Actions tab to open Figure 183. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

240

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 183 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Actions

Click Add in Figure 183. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 184. The action can be any combination of the options with the exception listed in Table 69. Refer to Table 69 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

241

Figure 184 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Actions - Add

Table 69 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Actions - Add Field Description

Field Index Name Permit Deny Set 802.1p Set DSCP Description Value range: 1 - 80 Up to 20 characters Set permission Set permission Value range: 0 - 7 Value range: 0 - 63 Not applicable if Set TOS precedence or Set TOS is selected. Set TOS Precedence Value range: 0 - 7 Not applicable if Set DSCP is selected.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

242

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Table 69 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Actions - Add Field Description

Field Change VLAN ID Change Destination Interface Set Priority Set Destination MAC Copy To Mirror Port Set Drop Precedence Description Value range: 1 - 4092 Value range: Internal 1 -16 / FE 1 - 4 / GE 1 - 2 Value range: 0 - 7 Value range: valid MAC address Enable coping to mirror port Enable drop precedence

Select an entry in Figure 183 and click Delete to remove the entry. An action cannot be removed if theres rules associated with it. Delete the rules associated with the selected action first. Meters Metering is applied on egress ports. If the egress port line rate is lower than the configured CIR, ICM3/3G applies the maximum CIR and burst size supported by the egress port. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Packet Classification. Click the Meters tab to open Figure 185. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 185 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Meters

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

243

Click Add in Figure 185. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 186. Refer to Table 69 for more details. Figure 186 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Meters - Add

Table 70 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Meters - Add Field Description

Field Index CIR Burst Size Description Value range: 1 - 64 Value range: 64 - 1000000 Value range: 4K - 512K

Select an entry in Figure 185 and click Delete to remove the entry. Flow Counters ICM3/3G supports 32 flow-based traffic statistics counters. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Packet Classification. Click the Flow Counters tab to open Figure 187. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

244

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 187 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Flow Counters

Select an entry in Figure 187 and click Reset to reset the packet counters. Or click Reset ALL to reset all the counters. Rules Create Masks and Actions before creating packet classification rules. IP DSLAM supports 80 rules shared between all ports. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select Packet Classification. Click the Rules tab to open Figure 188. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

245

Figure 188 ICM3 - Packet Classification - Rules

Click Add or select an entry and click Modify in Figure 188. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 189 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

246

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 189 ICM3/3G - Packet Classification - Rules - Add

Select an entry in Figure 188 and click Delete to remove the entry. Or click Delete All to remove all entries. QoS ICM3/3G module supports the following QoS configuration:

Priority DSCP Priority Queue Mapping L2 Scheduling

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

247

Priority This feature enables/disables the mapping between DSCP and 802.1p. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select QoS to open Figure 190. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 190 ICM3 - QoS - Priority

Click the DSCP Priority field of a port and configure the priority in the drop down menu as shown in Figure 191. Click Apply to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

248

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 191 ICM3 - QoS - Priority - Modify

DSCP Priority This feature configures the 802.1p priority for DSCP. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select QoS. Click the DSCP Priority tab to open Figure 192. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

249

Figure 192 ICM3 - QoS - DSCP Priority

Click the IEEE 802.1p Priority field of a DSCP and configure the priority in the drop down menu as shown in Figure 193. Click Apply to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

250

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 193 ICM3 - QoS - DSCP Priority - Modify

Queue Mapping This feature configures the CoS traffic class for 802.1p priority. Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select QoS. Click the Queue Mapping tab to open Figure 194. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

251

Figure 194 ICM3 - QoS - Queue Mapping

Click the CoS Traffic Class field of 802.1p priority and configure the traffic class in the drop down menu as shown in Figure 195. Click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer Table 71 to for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

252

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Figure 195 ICM3 - QoS - DSCP Mapping - Modify

Table 71 ICM3/3G - QoS - DSCP Mapping

802.1p Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS Traffic Class Range 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Default 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7

L2 Scheduling Expand the active ICM3/3G module from the tree view and select QoS. Click the L2 Scheduling tab to open Figure 196. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

253

Figure 196 ICM3 - QoS - L2 Scheduling

Click the Enable or Disable radio button in Figure 196 to enable/disable WRED (Weighted Random Early Discard) option. Click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Select a scheduling algorithm in Figure 196 and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. ICM3/3G support the following scheduling method:

Strict priority (SP) Any packets residing in the higher-priority queues are transmitted first. Only when these queues are empty packets of the next lower priority are allowed to be transmitted.

Weighted round robin (WRR) The scheduler selects one packet from each queue and go around all active queues that have a pending packet. All active queues are programmed with weights according to the desired packet distribution.

Weighted Fair Queue (WFQ) The scheduler provides a certain minimum bandwidth to all queues for transmission preventing the starvation of packets in lower priority queues.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

254

Chapter 4: Provisioning - ICM3/3G Module

Configured guaranteed bandwidth is first supplied per queue. Any remaining bandwidth up to the configured maximum bandwidth is distributed either by priority or in round-robin fashion. The provides for controllable CoS behavior while not allowing starvation of low priority queues.

WRR+SP combination Both strict priority and weighted round-robin are supported. The weight of one or more of the CoS queues can be set to zero (largest number) and non-zero weights are assigned for other queues. Packets in queues with weight 0 are always sent first as long as there are packets in the Transaction Queues for these queues. If there are no packets in the queues of weight 0, then packets are sent from other queues in a weighted round-robin fashion.

WFQ+SP combination Both strict priority and weighted fair queuing are supported. User assigned priority queues are scheduled on a strict priority basis up to their maximum bandwidth settings, while the remaining queues are scheduled in a WFQ fashion according to their relative bandwidth settings.

Table 72 lists the default weight for the scheduling method: Table 72 ICM3/3G - QoS - L2 Scheduling - Weight for WRR / SP+WRR
Parameter Weights for Queue 0 Weights for Queue 1 Weights for Queue 2 Weights for Queue 3 Weights for Queue 4 Weights for Queue 5 Weights for Queue 6 Weights for Queue 7 WRR / SP+WRR 1 1 1 2 2 4 8 15 WFQ or SP+WFQ 3 3 3 6 6 12 23 44

Note: the total weights for SP queues and WFQ queues must be less than or equal to 100%. If the total weight of SP queues is less than 100%, the remaining bandwidth is divided among WFQ queues based on the configured weights in weighted round-robin fashion. If the total weight of WFQ queues is less than 100%, the remaining bandwidth is distributed among the queues in strict priority fashion. When a queue is removed from the strict priority queue list, the queue weight is set to the default value of 0, which indicates that no minimum bandwidth is allocated to it.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

PROVISIONING - PCU MODULE

This chapter provides configuration procedures for Peripheral Control Unit (PCU) module. PCU Module supports the following configurations:

Node Level Configuration

Reset

Module Summary Shelf Level Configuration Slot Level Configuration

PCU Clock Source Alarm Indication PDP

Node Level Configuration

Reset

PCU module supports module reset at the node level configuration.

PCU module supports both hardware reset and software reset through Netman 4000. The hard reset forces the PCU module to download software image from ICM3 module and reboot. The soft reset forces the PCU module to reboot without downloading software image. There is no checking of software version during the soft reset. Select the node from navigation tree and click Reset tab to open Figure 197. All modules are indicated with its shelf ID and slot ID. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest modules information. Select a PCU module and click Hard Rest or Soft Reset radio button. Click Reset in the Reset Module section to begin the reset.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

256

Chapter 5: Provisioning - PCU Module

Figure 197 PCU -Node - Reset

Module Summary

Module Summary section provides basic information and module location for PCU module. Expand the node from the navigation tree and select Module Summary to open Figure 198. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 73 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Shelf Level Configuration

257

Figure 198 PCU - Module Summary Window

Table 73 PCU - Module Summary Table

Field Module Entity Description Module type Module location X-Y: Shelf X Slot Y PCU module is always at slot P Hardware Version Software Version Module hardware version number Module software version number

Shelf Level Configuration

The shelf level configuration provides the actual slot occupier for the entire chassis. Expand the node from the navigation tree and select Shelf to open Figure 199. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

258

Chapter 5: Provisioning - PCU Module

Figure 199 PCU - Shelf View Window

In Figure 199, PCU module is represented with a board image in slot P. Double click on the PCU board image opens the Slot Level Configuration. Table 74 lists the guidelines for module placement and virtual configuration detail. Table 74 PCU Module Placements Details
Module Type PCU Maximum Number of Board Per Shelf Slot Used 1 P Virtual Configuration No

Slot Level Configuration

PCU module supports the following configuration:

PCU Clock Source Alarm Indication

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Slot Level Configuration

259

PDP

PCU

PCU provides the basic module information for the selected module. Expand the node and expand a shelf from the navigation tree. Select Slot P: PCU from the tree view to open Figure 200. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest n information. Refer to Table 75 for more details. Figure 200 PCU - PCU Window

Table 75 PCU - PCU Table

Parameter Hardware Version Software Version Serial Number Description The hardware version for this PCU module. The software version for this PCU module. The serial number of the PCU module.

Clock Source

System timing signal can be generated from external network timing or from internal clock generator. PCU module supports two external network timing signal: E1 type 2MHz timing reference and 64 KHz AMI composite Annex C timing reference. A proper PCU population switches between the internal and external source accordingly to kept synchronized. Moreover, ICM3 must also be properly configured for the external clock type. The external clock source is connected on PCU rear adaptor (RJ 45 socket marked CO Clock IN). If the Annex-C clock is lost, the line module resets the loops that are currently using Annex-C (including lines that select Annex-C as standard and lines that
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

260

Chapter 5: Provisioning - PCU Module

use Annex-C as a result of selecting auto-mode). If the line standard selected is auto-mode, the line module force the DSP to retain at the next best non-Annex-C line standard when such a ranking result is available. Otherwise the line module force the port to go through installation stage and scan without two Annex-C line standards. If the line standard selected is any Annex-C profile, the module forces the line to retrain using default profile. When Annex-C clock is recovered, the IPxDSL modules mark the event so that for the next line retrain, all the lines that have switched over to Non-Annex-C mode due to loss of clock will revert back to Annex-C mode. Expand the node and expand a shelf from the navigation tree. Select Slot P: PCU from the tree view and select the Clock Source tab to open Figure 201. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the clock source and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 76 for more details. Figure 201 PCU - Clock Source Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

261

Table 76 PCU - Clock Source Table

Field No External Clock Description System runs on internal Clock source. Default. E1 Clock Annex C Clock Select the external E1 Clock connected on PCU rear adaptor. Select the external Annex C clock connected on PCU rear adaptor.

Alarm Indication

Netman 4000 supports user-defined labels for PCU external alarms. The PCU collects external alarms from 8 general purpose sources that are defined by specific customer configuration. The ICM3 monitors the status of these external alarms and reports to Netman 4000. Expand the node and expand a shelf from the navigation tree. Select Slot P: PCU from the tree view and select the Alarm Indication tab to open Figure 202. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 77 for more details. Figure 202 PCU - Alarm Indication Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

262

Chapter 5: Provisioning - PCU Module

Table 77 PCU - Alarm Indication Table

Field Pin Label Description The user-defined alarm label (Note: the pin label field does not synchronized with the pin label configured from CLI.) Value range: a character string up to 138 characters Default: Not Configured Severity The severity of alarm for the detected the provisioned condition. Value range: Warning / Minor / Major / Critical Default: Warning Level The signal level at which the alarm will be raised. If Never Raise Alarm is selected all other fields are ignored. Value range: Low / High / Never Raise Alarm Default: Never Raise Alarm

Click Default in Figure 202 to reset all configurations to their default values. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Note: Please refer to the iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 Installation Manual for the exact location of the external alarm inputs. PDP PCU module supports audible alarm warning, visual alarm display and alarm collection from PDP modules. Visual alarm displays are implemented in two levels. On PDP, system LED is turned on when an external rack fan failure occurs. On PCU, one of the three severity-based LED (CRITICAL, MAJOR, MINOR) indicates the current highest alarm severity. Audible alarm is generated from PDP. It is triggered when either an external rack fan failure or fuse failure occurs. The audio sound can be turned off temporarily (until next alarm triggers it) with the AUDIO button on the PDP. Visual alarm indications, however, cannot be temporarily altered. User can define the alarm visual/audible display behavior from the CLI/Netman 4000. Expand the node and expand a shelf from the navigation tree. Select Slot P: PCU from the tree view and select the PDP tab to open Figure 203. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 78 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Slot Level Configuration

263

Figure 203 PCU - PDP Window

Table 78 PCU - PDP Table

Field Collect Alarm From PDP Description To enable/disable collecting alarm from PDP. Default: Disable Control LED on PDP To enable/disable PDP LED control. This parameter is applicable if Collect Alarm From PDP is enable. Default: Disable Control Buzzer on PDP To enable/disable PDP buzzer control. This parameter is applicable if Collect Alarm From PDP is enable. Default: Disable

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

264

Chapter 5: Provisioning - PCU Module

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

PROVISIONING - IFXS1 MODULE

iFXS1 module can be managed by UTStarcom's NMS platform - Netman 4000. This chapter describes iFXS module operations in Netman 4000 device management system.

Viewing iFXS1 Module Information

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1], and click the Board Info tab to display the iFXS1 Module Information Window. Refer to Table 79 for field descriptions. Figure 204 iFXS1 Module Information

Table 79 iFXS1 Module Information Window Field Description

Fields Serial Number Hardware Version Software Version Description Displays the module serial number Displays the module hardware version Displays the module software version
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

266

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Table 79 iFXS1 Module Information Window Field Description

Fields System Uptime FPGA Ver. Firmware Ver. CPU Usage Memory Usage <Hard Reset> Description Displays the system run time since last reset Displays the module FPGA version Displays the module firmware version Displays the percent of the module CPU usage Displays the percent of the module memory usage The hard reset forces iFXS to download software image from ICM3 before reboot. If iFXS software image is not in the ICM3 flash during the hard reset, the reset shall be applied but no download of software image from ICM3 is required. The same is applicable for FPGA image <Soft Reset> The soft reset enables iFXS module to check the software version and software image shall be downloaded when there is a higher version available in ICM3 Flash than the one running on the module. If iFXS software image is not in the ICM3 flash or has equal or lower version, the reset shall be applied but no download of software image from ICM is required. The same is applicable for FPGA image.

Configuring Module IP Address

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1], and click IP Config tab to display the IP Configuration window. The window enables users to set iFXS1 IP address for both media and signalling stream. Refer to Table 80 for field description.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring Module IP Address

267

Figure 205 IP Configuration

Table 80 IP Configuration Window Field Description

Fields IP Config Mode Description Static or DHCP. Static: users need to set IP address, net mask, gateway and DNS IP address for the iFXS1 module. DHCP: the iFXS1 module gets IP address, net mask, gateway and DNS IP address from DHCP server

DNS Option IP Netmask Gateway Usage

The DNS option is always enabled. Sets the iFXS1 module IP address Sets the netmask for the module IP address Sets the gateway for the module IP address Selects the IP address usage. Possible values are : unused, signaling, media, both

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

268

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Table 80 IP Configuration Window Field Description

Fields DNS DNS Port Description Sets primary/secondary DNS IP address Sets primary/secondary DNS port

Primary/Secondary Sets primary and secondary DNS IP address and port

Configuring MG Interface
Configuring Call Server From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ MG Interface], and click the Call Server tab to display the Call Server Configuration window. The window enables users to set call server protocol and call server type. Refer to Table 81 for field descriptions. Figure 206 Call Server

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring MG Interface

269

Table 81 Call Server Window Field Description

Fields Call Server Protocol Call Server Type Description Selects the call server protocol. Possible values are: SIP/ MGCP Selects the call server type. Possible values are: UTS, Broadsoft, Nortel, Asterisk

Configuring Misc

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ MG Interface], and click the Misc Config tab to display the Misc Config Configuration window. Users may enable/disable heartbeat and set SIP authentication option. Refer to Table 82 for field descriptions. Figure 207 Misc Config

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

270

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Table 82 Misc Configuration Window Field Description

Fields Heart Beat Description Enable or disable heart beat. When heart-beat option is enabled, MG will send and maintenance heart-beat message between MG and call server. When heart-beat option is disabled, MG will not send heart-beat messages to call server.

SIP Auth Option

Select the SIP authentication, possible values are MG Level and User Level. Only MG level is supported currently. When SIP Auth Option is MG Level, MG will use unique auth password for each SIP user to register to SIP registrar, and only SIP MG-level auth password is necessary to be configured. When SIP Auth Option is User Level, each SIP will use respective auth password to register to SIP registrar, and operator has to configure each SIP auth password in SIP user level.

InterDigitTimer BusyTone DialTone RingTone CallWaitingTone HowlerTone RecorderTone

Displays the inter digit timer. The value range is 5-20s. The default value is 5s. Displays the busy tone length. The value range is 20-60s. The default value is 30s. Displays the dial tone length. The value range is 10-60s. The default value is 16s. Displays the ringing back tone length. The value range is 60-300. The default value is 180s. Displays the call waiting tone length. The value range is 20-60s. The default value is 30s. Displays the howler tone length. The value range is 0-300s. The default value is 60s. Displays the recorder tone length. The value range is 20-60s. The default value is 30s.

Configuring T.38

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ MG Interface], and click the T.38 tab to display the T.38 Configuration window. Refer to Table 83 for field description.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring QoS

271

Figure 208 T.38

Table 83 T.38 Window Field Descriptio

Fields Reversal Option T.38 Option DTMF 2833 Option T.38 Fax mode CallID Type DigitMap Description Enable or disable the reversal option. Enable or disable the T.38 option. Enable or disable the DTMF 2833 option. Select T.38 fax mode from the drop-down list box. Possible values are: MGC controlled, GW controlled, SIP/MG controlled. Selects caller ID type from the drop-down list box. Possible values are: Bellcore, ETSI, NTT, UK, Chinese Configures the digit map for SIP user. String up to 512 letters from 0~9, T, A, B, C, D, #, *, x, [,], -.

Configuring QoS
Configuring TOS/DSCP From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ QoS], and click the TOS/DSCP tab to display the TOS/DSCP Configuration window. Users are enabled to set TOS/DSCP parameters. Refer to Table 84 for field descriptions.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

272

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Figure 209 TOS/DSCP

Table 84 TOS/DSCP Window Field Description

Fields TOS/DSCP Option TOS RTP Precedence Signaling Precedence Sets the IP precedence bits of the TOS byte in the IP header on media packets (RTP). The value range is 0 -7. The default value is 5. Sets the IP precedence bits of the TOS byte in the IP header on signaling packets. The value range is 0 -7. The default value is 5. Description Select QoS option. Possible values are TOS, DSCP, NONE

DSCP the DSCP value in the IP header on signaling packets (SIP, MGCP), VoIP media packets (RTP) RTP DSCP Sets the DSCP value in the IP header on VoIP media packets (RTP). Possible values are: AF11, AF12, AF13, AF21, AF22, AF23, AF31, AF32, AF33, AF41, AF42, AF43, BE, EF. The default is AF11. Sets the DSCP the DSCP value in the IP header on signaling packets. Possible values are: AF11, AF12, AF13, AF21, AF22, AF23, AF31, AF32, AF33, AF41, AF42, AF43, BE, EF. The default is AF11.

Signaling DSCP

Configuring VLAN Tag

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ QoS], and click the VLAN Tag tab to display the TOS/DSCP
July 2006

Configuring QoS

273

Configuration window. Users are enabled to configure VLANs for signaling and media streams per iFXS1 module. Refer to Table 85 for field description. Figure 210 VLAN Tag

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

274

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Table 85 VLAN Tag Window Field Description

Fields VLAN Option RTP VLAN ID RTP VLAN Mode Signaling VLAN Mode Description Enables or disables VLAN option Enters the VLAN ID for VoIP media stream. The value range is 1-4092. The mode is always fullbridging The mode is always fullbridging

Signaling VLAN ID Enters the VLAN ID for signaling. The value range is 1-4092.

Configuring User Interface

Node Configuration From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ User Interface], and click the Node Configuration tab to display the Node Configuration window. Refer toTable 86 for field description. Figure 211 Node Configuration

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring User Interface

275

Table 86 Node Configuration Window Field Description

Fields Hook Flash (min) Hook Flash (max) Impedance Compander Caller ID Ring Duration (ms) Description Selects the minimum flash hook timing. The value range is 50 1000ms with the step of 50ms. Selects the maximum flash hook timing. The value range is 100 1000ms with the step of 50ms. Selects the impedance. possible values are: 600 ohm, customized, default complex, 900 ohm Selects the PCM type for the FXS port. Possible values are: A-law, U-law Select the caller ID type. Possible values are Bellcore, ETSI, NTT, UK, Chinese Selects the Caller ID initial ring duration. The value range is 400 2000ms.

Port Configuration

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ User Interface], and click the Port Configuration tab to display the Port Configuration window. Refer to Table 87 for field description.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

276

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Figure 212 Port Configuration

Table 87 Port Configuration Window Field Description

Fields Port Tx Rx Admin Operate Usage Description Displays the FXS port number Displays the Tx gain of the FXS port. The value range is 0 - -9dB with the step of 0.5dB. Displays the Rx gain of the FXS port. The value range is 0 - -9dB with the step of 0.5dB. Displays the administrative state of the FXS port. Possible values are Unlocked, Shutting down, Locked Displays the operational status of the FXS port. Possible values are Enabled, Disabled, Testing Display the port status. Possible values are Idle, Active, Busy, Fault, Unknown

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring User Interface

277

Modifying a FXS Port Follow the steps below to modify a FXS port. 1 Select User Interface under the iFXS1 module from the configuration navigation tree. 2 Click Port Configuration tab. The Port Configuration window is displayed as shown in Figure 212. 3 Select a port. 4 Click <Modify>. The iFXS Port Level Config window is displayed.

5 Modify the port according to description in Table 87. 6 Click <Apply>. The port information is displayed in iFXS Port Level Config window. Configuring Ring Definition From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ User Interface], and click the Ring Definition tab to display the Ring Definition window. Users are enabled to configure up to 7 different patterns of distinctive ringing as well as basic ringer pattern per node.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

278

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Figure 213 Ring Definition

Table 88 Ring Definition Window Field Description

Fields Index Definition Description Displays the ring pattern index. The value range is 1-8. 1 refers to the basic ring pattern. Displays the ring pattern definition. Pattern of ring cadence is a cycle of ring on and off duration with semicolon. For example, 400;200;400;2000 means 400 ms on, 200 ms off, 400 ms on, 2000 ms off Pattern Definition shall follow the format as listed below. It shall be a complete cycle of ringing period. <on 1>:<off 1>,<on 2>:<off 2>, <on 3>:<off 3>, <on 4>:<off 4>

Add a Ring Definition Follow the steps below to add a ring definition. 1 Select User Interface under the iFXS1 module from the configuration navigation tree.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual July 2006

Configuring MG Media

279

2 Click Ring Definition tab. The Ring Definition Configuration window is displayed as shown in Figure 213. 3 Click <Add>. The Ring Definition Config window is displayed.

4 Refer to Table 14 to configure the ring pattern. 5 Click <Apply>. The new added entry is listed in Ring Definition Configuration window.

Configuring MG Media
Configuring VoIP Media From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ MG Media], and click the VoIP Media tab to display the VoIP Media Window. Users are enabled to configure IP address of each RTP stream. Refer to Table 89 for field description.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

280

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Figure 214 VoIP Media

Table 89 VoIP Media Window Field Description

Fields RTP UDP Port Base Address RTP UDP Number of ports Echo tail length Description Displays the IP address of each RTP stream Selects the RTP UDP number of the FXS ports. Possible values are: 24, 48 Selects the echo tail length value. Possible values are 8, 16, 32, and 64.

Configuring Jitter Buffer

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ MG Media], and click the Jitter Buffer tab to display the Jitter Buffer Window. Refer to Table 90 for field description.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring MG Media

281

Figure 215 Jitter Buffer

Table 90 Jitter Buffer Window Field Description

Fields Index Codec Type Description Displays the jitter buffer entry index for different Codec type Displays the Codec type. Possible values are: g711ALaw64KAudio, g711ULaw64KAudio, g726d32KAudio, g729dAudio, 7231dAudio Packet Size Max Jitter Min Jitter Nom Jitter Displays the maximum jitter buffer size for the specified codec type Displays the minimum jitter buffer size for the specified codec type Displays the normal jitter buffer size for the specified codec type

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

282

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Table 90 Jitter Buffer Window Field Description

Fields Priority Num Channel Bad Channel Description The priority for the codec type. The value range is 1-5, the lower value refers to the higher priority Displays the number of channels Displays the number of bad channels

Configuring SIP
Configuring SIP Port From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ SIP], and click the SIP Port tab to display the SIP Port Window. Refer to Table 91 for field descriptions. Figure 216 SIP Port

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring SIP

283

Table 91 SIP Port Window Field Description

Fields App Index SIP Port Transport Protocol Description Displays the application index Displays the port number of SIP register. The default value is 5060. Displays the transport protocol

SIP Summary Statistics

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ SIP], and click the SIP Summary Statistics tab to display the SIP Summary Statistics Window. The window displays SIP summary statistics information. Figure 217 SIP Summary Statistics

SIP Supported Methods

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ SIP], and click the SIP Supported Methods tab to display the SIP Supported Methods Window. Refer to Table 92 for field descriptions.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

284

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Figure 218 SIP Supported Methods

Table 92 SIP Supported Method Window Field Description

Fields App Index Method Index Method Name Description Displays the SIP application index Displays the method index. Displays the method name. Basic methods include INVITE, ACK, CANCEL, OPTIONS, BYE, and REGISTER. Advanced methods depend on service.

SIP Methods Statistics

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ SIP], and click the SIP Methods Statistics tab to display the SIP Methods Statistics Window. The window displays the SIP method statistics information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring SIP UA

285

Figure 219 SIP Methods Statistics

Configuring SIP UA
General Config From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ SIP UA], and click the General Config tab to display the General Config window. Refer to Table 93 for field descriptions.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

286

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Figure 220 General Config

Table 93 General Configuration Window Field Description

Fields Home Domain SIP Proxy Address SIP Registrar Address Description Enters the name of SIP domain that a SIP UA belongs to. String up to 128 ASCII characters Displays the active SIP proxy IP address Displays the active SIP registrar IP address

Server Table

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ SIP UA], and click the Server Table tab to display the Server Table window. Refer to Table 94 for field descriptions.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring SIP UA

287

Figure 221 Server Table

Table 94 General Configuration Window Field Description

Fields App Index Server Index Server Function Server Address Type Server Address Server Type Description Displays the SIP application index Displays the server index Displays the server function Displays the server address type Displays the server IP address Displays the server type

MG Table

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ SIP UA], and click the MG Table tab to display the MG Table window. Refer to Table 95 for field descriptions.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

288

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

Figure 222 MG Table

Table 95 MG Table Window Field Description

Fields MG Index Host Name Port Num expires Heart Beat Timer Admin Status Operation Status Auth Password Profile Description Displays the MG index Displays SIP home domain name Displays the SIP port number Displays the expiring period. The default value is 3600s Displays the heart beat timer. The value range is 10-1000s. The default value is 60s. Displays the MG administrative status: locked, shutting down, unlocked Displays MG operation status: Up/Down Displays the authentication password which is all SIP users to register to SIP registrar when authentication digest requires Displays the MGC profile

User Table

From the configuration management navigation tree, select [Node/Shelf (x) /Slot (y):iFXS1/ SIP UA], and click the User Table tab to display the User Table window. Refer to Table 22 for field descriptions.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Configuring SIP UA

289

Figure 223 User Table

Table 96 User Table Window Field Description

Fields User Index User ID Phone Number Display Name Auth ID Auth Password profile Description Displays the SIP user index Displays the SIP user ID Displays the phone number Displays the SIP user display name. The default is user ID. Displays the SIP authentication ID Displays the SIP authentication password Displays the SIP profile name

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

290

Chapter 6: Provisioning - iFXS1 Module

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

PROVISIONING - IPXDSL MODULE

This chapter provides configuration procedures for IPxDSL module. Figure 224 shows the main window of the IPxDSL provisioning management. Figure 224 IPxDSL Provisioning Main Window

IPxDSL module supports the following configurations:

Node Level Configuration

Reset

Module Summary Shelf Level Configuration Module Level Configuration

IPxDSL Customized Filter PPPoE Snooping

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

292

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Test Timeout

Port Level Configuration

WAN Port xDSL ATM Bridge IGMP VLAN Access List QoS

Note: Please note the following naming convention for the modules:

IPADSLx is a joint name for all ADSL line cards modules including IPADSL3A, IPADSL3B, IPADSL6A and IPADSL6B IPxDSL is a joint name for all line card modules including IPADSL3A, IPADSL3B, IPADSL6A, IPADSL6B and IPSHDSL3 xDSL is a joint name for all DSL port including ADSL and SHDSL

Node Level Configuration

Reset

IPxDSL module supports module reset at the node level configuration.

IPxDSL modules support both hardware reset and software reset through Netman 4000. Hardware reset forces download of software image from ICM3 to a line card irrespective of the version on the line card. For virtual modules, this hardware reset is performed after a software reset. The hardreset forces line module to download software image from ICM3 before reboot. If the corresponding LC software image is not in the ICM3 flash during the hardreset, the reset is applied but no download of software image from ICM3 is required. The softreset allows line modules to check the software version and software is downloaded when there is a higher version available in ICM 3Flash than the one running on the module. If the corresponding LC software image is not in the ICM3 flash or has equal or lower version, the reset is applied but no download of software image from ICM is required. A software reset can also be used to recover the module from any software loop conditions or other anomalies. A typical example is; though the card is

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Node Level Configuration

293

physically presented in the system but the system does not recognize the module correctly. In such scenarios, a software reset shall be followed by a hardware reset. Select the node and click the Reset tab to open Figure 225. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest modules information. Figure 225 Node - Reset

For IPxDSL modules, select the module and click Hard Rest or Soft Reset radio button. Click Reset to begin the reset.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

294

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Module Summary

IPxDSL modules supports the following options for module summary:

Module Information Active Ports

Module Information

Module Summary section provides basic information and module location for PCU module. Expand the node from the navigation tree and select Module Summary to open Figure 226. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 97 for more details. Figure 226 IPxDSL - Module Summary - Module Information Window

Table 97 ICM3 - Module Summary - Module Information Table

Field Module Entity Description Module type Module location X-Y: Shelf X Slot Y Hardware Version Software Version Module hardware version number Module software version number

Active Ports

Active Ports section provides lists of active ports for IPxDSL modules.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Shelf Level Configuration

295

Expand the node from the navigation tree and select Module Summary. Click Active Ports tab to open Figure 227. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 98 for more details. Figure 227 IPxDSL - Module Summary - Active Ports Window

Table 98 ICM3 - Module Summary - Active Ports Table

Field Module Entity Description IPxDSL module type Module location X-Y: Shelf X Slot Y Active Ports Active ports list

Shelf Level Configuration

The shelf level configuration provides the actual slot occupier for the entire chassis. Expand the node from the navigation tree and select Shelf to open Figure 228. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

296

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 228 IPxDSL - Shelf Window

In Figure 228, the physical IPxDSL modules are represented with a board image. For example, slot 2, 4, and 5. Virtual modules are represented with text VACANT followed by its board-name. For example, slot 6 to 13. All other slots are empty slots. Double click on the board image opens the Module Level Configuration. Table 99 lists the guidelines for module placement and virtual configuration detail. Table 99 IPxDSL Module Placements Details
Module Type IPADSL3A IPADSL3B Maximum Number of Board Per Shelf Slot Used 16 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 Virtual Configuration Yes Yes

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Shelf Level Configuration

297

Table 99 IPxDSL Module Placements Details

Module Type IPADSL6A IPADSL6B IPSHDSL3 Maximum Number of Board Per Shelf Slot Used 16 16 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 Virtual Configuration Yes Yes Yes

Virtual Board Assignment

The board assignment feature permits assigning virtual module board to a vacant slot on iAN8K B1000 shelf. The virtual board assignment is supported for all IPxDSL modules. Provisioning can be carried out without the physical module presented in the node. When adding or removing a virtual board from the system or moving a virtual board to a different slot, the board must be de-assigned or reassigned to the related slot. From the shelf view, right click on an empty slot in Figure 228. Figure 229 prompts for confirmation. Click Yes to confirm the creation and click OK in Figure 230 after selecting the virtual board type. The new virtual board then appears in the slot with a label VACANT followed by the board_name. Figure 229 IPxDSL - Virtual Board Assignment Window

Figure 230 IPxDSL - Virtual Board Assignment - Module Type Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

298

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

To de-assign a slot, right click a virtual board to open Figure 231. Click Yes to confirm the deletion. The virtual board is then removed immediately. The configuration of this virtual board is removed permanently. Figure 231 IPxDSL - Virtual Board Deassignment Window

When a physical module is inserted to a slot that has virtual configuration, the module assumes all the virtual configuration if the module types are the same. If the module type does not match the virtual module assigned in the slot, a module type mismatch alarm is raised and the inserted module becomes inoperative. To clear the alarm, de-assigned the virtual module or remove the physical module. A Syslog event is generated along with the alarm. If a slot is occupied with a physical module, right clicking the slot will not bring up any dialogue box since no board assignment / de-assignment is applicable to this slot. However, double clicking a slot with a physical board will bring up the module configuration window for this board.

Module Level Configuration

The module configuration can be accessed either by selecting a IPxDSL module in the tree view of the device manager window or by double clicking the module in the shelf view. IPxDSL modules supports the following configuration at the slot level:

IPxDSL Customized Filter Test Timeout PPPoE Snooping

Note: Please note the following naming convention for the modules:

IPADSLx is a joint name for all ADSL line cards modules including IPADSL3A, IPADSL3B, IPADSL6A and IPADSL6B IPxDSL is a joint name for all line card modules including IPADSL3A, IPADSL3B, IPADSL6A, IPADSL6B and IPSHDSL3 xDSL is a joint name for all DSL port including ADSL and SHDSL

IPxDSL
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

This feature provides the basic module information.

July 2006

Module Level Configuration

299

Select an IPxDSL module from the tree view to open Figure 232. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 100 for more details. Figure 232 IPxDSL - IPADSL3A Window

Table 100 IPxDSL - IPxDSL Table

Field Name Hardware Version Software Version Serial Number Uptime Description The current hardware version for this board. The current software version for this board. The serial number for the module. The duration that the board is up since the last reset.Read-only.

Customized Filter

The system allows the user to configure/view various filtering related function at module level. Semi-Static Forwarding This feature is designed to prevent malicious users from using duplicated MAC address. When Semi-static forwarding database feature is enabled, all the learnt MAC address entries of DSL ports in forwarding database are treated as static configured entry. These entries are not aged out based on aging timer, and these entries are not overwritten by new traffic. These entries are displayed as dynamic entries in CLI/Netman 4000.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

300

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

In the situation that the subscriber needs to switch PC or switch ADSL port, the ADSL line should be reset, which will clear out the old entries for this ADSL port and force the line card to re-learn the address. Gateway ARP Filter The IPxDSL module supports Gateway ARP filtering function. When this feature is enabled, the IPxDSL module monitors the ARP request/reply packets on all ADSL ports uplink traffic. The ARP packet is discarded if its "sender protocol address" matches the gateway address configured by the user. The packet discard counter for that bridge port is increased accordingly. Aging Timer The aging time is the number of seconds a MAC address is kept in the forwarding database after having received a packet from this MAC address. The entries in the forwarding database are periodically timed out to ensure they won't stay around forever. The IPxDSL module can set the bridge ageing timer per module configuration. The default timer length is 14400 seconds (4 hours). The valid timer values are a range of 10 seconds to 1 million seconds. Upstream Multicast Filter IPxDSL module supports a module level "upstream multicast filtering". When upstream multicast filtering is enabled, upstream multicast/broadcast packet is forwarded as shown below:

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Module Level Configuration

301

Figure 233 IPxDSL - Customized Filter - Upstream Multicast Filter Packet Flow - Enabled
Upstream Multicast packet

Enabled

Upstream multicast filtering

Disabled

Yes

broadcast packet ?

No Follow Next Figure

Yes

IP or ARP packet ?

No

No

IP Multicast packet ?

Yes

No

IGMP packet ?

Yes

No Forward to all ports

Is IGMPsnooping Enabled ?

Yes

Discard

Forward per IGMP snooping requirement

When "upstream multicast filtering" is disabled (default), the upstream multicast packets are forwarded as shown below. Broadcast packets are forwarded to all ports.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

302

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 234 IPxDSL - Customized Filter - Upstream Multicast Filter Packet Flow - Disabled
Incom M ing ulticat packet

YS E

Is IG P M snooping E nabled ?

N O

Yes

IGMP packet?

No

F ound

S earch group address

N found ot

U nknow discard n Forward per IGMP snooping requirements

check IG P M snoop rule

U nknow forw n ard

Forward as broadcast packet

F ard per orw m ullticast group port m ap

D iscard

ARP Tracking Provides information on the mapping between subscriber's IP address and MAC address. It is implemented by snooping the ARP traffic passing through the module. Unlike the ARP table used by any IP host, which always provides the up-to-date ARP mapping by sending and receiving ARP packets, the ARP table here provides a history of snooping results. Entries are not aged out. Each entry is uniquely identified by the MAC address filed, the content of the entry remains current so long as the device owning the MAC address remains active. The
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual July 2006

Module Level Configuration

303

entry stays in the table after the device becomes inactive. Operators can reset the table to obtain a snapshot of active subscriber and flush out such inactive entries. The approach not only simplifies the implementation, but it also allows the operator to view the history information for those users that were active on the module and then turned in-active at the time the table is viewed. The size of ARP table is limited to 100 entries. If the table overflows, new entry overwrites old entries by the rule of "first in first out". IP address is unique in the ARP table. New entry with identical IP address overwrites old entry. ARP snooping enables the feature. Disabling ARP table tracking also resets the ARP table and the content of ARP table is cleared after module reset. NetBIOS Filter IPxDSL module supports NetBIOS packet filtering function. The NetBIOS filter can either be disabled, applied on uplink only or applied on both directions. When NetBIOS filter is applied on both directions, packets received from any bridge port are filtered in such way that the NetBIOS packets encapsulated over TCP/UDP or directly carried by IEEE 802.2 LLC are discarded. When NetBIOS filter is applied on uplink only, only packets received from PVC-mapped bridge ports are filtered. For the NetBIOS packets carried over TCP/UDP, the filter discards any packets that are sending to the UDP/TCP port 137, 138, 139 or 445. This helps in preventing users from using applications like Microsoft Network Neighborhood for unauthorized access. DHCP Filter This can be used to avoid subscribers getting DHCP service from an unauthorized DHCP server on user ports. DHCP filters are used to filter DHCP server type packets. Filters can be applied on uplink/downlink or both types of traffic.

DHCP uplink filtering The IPxDSL module supports DHCP uplink filtering function. When DHCP uplink filter is enabled, packets received from PVC-mapped bridge ports are filtered in such way that all DHCP to client packets are discarded.

DHCP downlink filtering

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

304

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

The IPxDSL module supports DHCP downlink filtering function. When DHCP downlink filter is enabled, packets transmitted from PVC-mapped bridge ports are filtered in such way that all DHCP to server packets are discarded. DLF Counter Database Lookup Failure (DLF) occurs when the IPxDSL module cannot find a destination MAC address entry, within its database, for the incoming Ethernet frame. The IPxDSL module allows operator to limit the rate of total DLF frames that could be forwarded by the bridge. Within a period of one second, if the total number of DLF frames (including the latest one) is less or equal to the threshold specified by the user, the latest DLF frame are forwarded to all ports excluding the one from which the DLF frame is received; if the total number of DLF frames is larger than the threshold specified by the user, the latest DLF frame is discarded. The discarding is counted in the bridge discarding PM counter. IGMP Snooping Traditional Ethernet bridges and switches forward packets with broadcast or multicast destination to each of the interface on the device, excluding the one from which the packets are received. This approach works well for broadcast packets, which are meant to be seen by all hosts on the network. In the case of multicast packets, however, this approach could lead to less efficient use of network bandwidth. Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packet is a creative effort to solve this problem. (IGMP is a protocol used by IP hosts to register their dynamic multicast group membership). The switches use the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded through the switch to determine which segments should receive packets directed to the group address. IGMP snooping allows the bridge device to monitor the IGMP packets and reduces the flooding of IP multicast traffic through the ADSL access line. The main function is to reduce the flooding of IP multicast traffic. Unrecognized IGMP messages are not used to build membership table and are forwarded to all ports. The IGMP membership reports and leave group messages are forwarded only to the WAN port. IGMP membership report and IGMP leave group message received from the WAN port are discarded. When IGMP membership report is intercepted from PVC-based bridge port the bridge forwards this IGMP report only to the WAN port. The IGMP query (general or group-specific) message received from the WAN port is forwarded to all PVC-based bridge ports. The IPxDSL module monitors the response of IGMP query. If a port fails to respond to IGMP query for three consecutive times, the port is removed from the member list. If an IGMP query message is received from the PVC-based bridge port, the message is discarded. After, all PVC-based bridge port members leave a group; the group information is removed. IPxDSL modules support 256 groups per module and 256 groups per port.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Module Level Configuration

305

The handling of the multicast packet is explained below:

When IGMP snoop is disabled, all multicast packets are forwarded as broadcast packets. When IGMP snoop is enabled, incoming downstream-multicast packet, which is not IGMP packets, are forwarded according to a multicast-forwarding table (MAC address based) for corresponding VLAN. The forwarding table is derived from the multicast group membership table learnt via IGMP snooping. If the multicast group MAC address cannot be found in the membership table, The packets are forwarded according to the following:

user configured "forward unknown" when enable IGMP snooping, the received packet is forwarded to all ports, user configured "discard unknown" when enable IGMP snooping, the received packet is discarded.

DHCP Option82 The DHCP relay agent information option (option 82) enables a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay agent to include information about itself when forwarding client-originated DHCP packets to a DHCP server. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other parameter-assignment policies. iAN8K B1000 supports DHCP Option 82 feature on all linecard modules in compliance with IETF RFC3046 with exceptions as explained below. This feature is enabled/disabled on a per module basis. The Option 82 feature is disabled by default. The Option 82 feature supports agent circuit ID sub-option (code 1) specified in the IETF RFC3046. The circuit ID sub-option follows the format below: Table 101 Format of Circuit ID Sub-option in DHCP Option 82
Field Sub-option Length Port label Length 1 byte 1 byte 1 - 64 bytes Description 0x01 circuit ID sub-option Total length of the port label Port label

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

306

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

The Option 82 feature supports agent remote ID sub-option (code 2) specified in the IETF RFC3046. The remote ID sub-option follows the format below: Table 102 Format of Remote ID Sub-option in DHCP Option 82
Field Sub-option Length Vendor ID Port Type Version VLAN ID NAS_MAC NAS_IP Node Shelf Slot Port VPI VCI Length 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes Description 0x02 remote ID sub-option Total length of the value fields 0x079d UTStarcom vendor ID 0x01 ATM port 0x01 version 1 Port VLAN ID (0x00 for untagged) MAC address of line card Ethernet port GIADDR (0x00 not used by a bridge) Node ID Shelf ID Line card slot Line card port VPI of port VCI of port

The Option 82 feature, when enabled, supports the following rules for client-to-server DHCP packets for IPADSL1 modules:

For a received DHCP packet, if the GIADDR field is set (i.e., non-zero) and the relay agent information option 82 already presents, iAN8K B1000 forwards the packet along without changing anything. For a received DHCP packet, if the GIADDR field is not set (i.e., zero) and the relay agent information option 82 is already present, iAN8K B1000 overwrites relay agent information option 82 with its own information. For a received DHCP packet, if the relay agent information option 82 is not present, iAN8K B1000 adds the relay agent information option 82 with its own information.

The Option 82 feature, when enabled, supports the following rules for client-to-server DHCP packets for IPADSL3/3A/3B and IPSHDSL/3 modules:

For a received DHCP packet, if the relay agent information option 82 is present, IP-DSLMAN overwrites relay agent information option 82 with its own information. For a received DHCP packet, if the relay agent information option 82 is not present, iAN8K B1000 adds the relay agent information option 82 with its own information.

Select an IPxDSL module from the tree view and select Customized Filter tab to open Figure 235. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Module Level Configuration

307

parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 103 for more details. Figure 235 IPxDSL - Customized Filter Window

Table 103 IPxDSL - Customized Filter Table

Field Name Semi-static Forwarding Description When Semi-static Forwarding is enabled, all the learnt MAC address entries in forwarding database are treated as static configured entry. These entries are not aged out based on aging timer, and these entries are not overwritten by new traffic. These entries are displayed as dynamic entries in Netman forwarding DB display. Value range: Disabled / Enabled (flush on port down) / Enabled (flush on port lock) Default: Disabled Gateway ARP Filter The IPADSL module supports a gateway ARP filtering function. When feature is enabled, the IPADSL module monitors the ARP request/reply packets on all ADSL port uplink traffic. The ARP packet is discarded if its "sender protocol address" matches the gateway address configured by the user. The packet discard counter for that bridge port is increased accordingly. Value range: Enabled / Disabled Default: Disabled Gateway IP Address IP address of router at the WAN uplink, used with the gateway ARP filter Value range: valid IP Address

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

308

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Table 103 IPxDSL - Customized Filter Table

Field Name Aging Timer Description To set the bridge ageing timer. After this interval all the forwarding table entries are flushed. Value range: 10 - 1 million seconds Default: 14400 seconds Unknown VLAN Packet processing for unknown VLAN. Value range: Discard / Forward Default: Discard Read-only Upstream Multicast Filter By enabling this option, the upstream multicast packet will be forwarded to all the ports if they are IP or ARP broadcast packets. Or they will be forwarded as per IGMP snooping rules if it's a IGMP multicast packet with IGMP snooping enabled. Value range: Enabled / Disabled Default: Disabled Note: Receipt of any Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) packets from the CPE at the ICM3 will increase the time required to upgrade the ICM3 due to the additional STP packet processing during initialization. Enable this filter during the upgrade process if the time to upgrade the ICM3 seems longer the normal. This prevents any STP packets originating from the CPE from being received at the ICM during its upgrade and initialization. IGMP Last Query Interval The amount of time the line module waits for a response to an IGMP Group Specific Query the line module has issued after an IGMP Leave message is received from a PVC-based bridge port. Value range: 1 - 255 Default: 1 IGMP no-response-leave Query Interval The amount of time the line module waits for a response to an IGMP Group query the line module has issued when a port fails to respond to a router's query.This is used along with the IGMP no-response-leave query count field. Value range: 1 - 255 Default: 2 ILMI Based CPE Management ARP Tracking When enabled, ILMI PVC is created. When disabled, ILMI PVC is deleted automatically. Value range: Enabled / Disabled Provides information on the mapping between subscriber's IP address and MAC address. It is implemented by snooping the ARP traffic passing through the module. This is for information purpose only and does not effect packet forwarding loopup. Value range: Enabled / Disabled Default: Disabled NetBIOS Filtering When NetBIOS filter is enabled, incoming packet filters are applied on all ADSL ports and Ethernet port; to filter out (discard) the NetBIOS packets that are encapsulated over TCP/UDP or directly carried by IEEE 802.2 LLC. Value range: Disabled / Uplink Only / Both Directions Default: Uplink Only

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Module Level Configuration

309

Table 103 IPxDSL - Customized Filter Table

Field Name DHCP Filtering Description Uplink Filter - When DHCP uplink filter is enabled, an incoming packet filter is applied on all ADSL ports, as a result, all DHCP server to client packets are discarded Downlink Filter - When DHCP downlink filter is enabled, an outgoing packet filter is applied on all ADSL ports, as the result, all DHCP client to server packets are discarded. This is used to avoid subscribers getting DHCP service from an unauthorized DHCP server if existing on a user port. This field is applicable only is server is on DSL port. Value range: Disabled / Uplink Only / Downlink Only / Both Directions Default: Uplink Only DLF Counter Database Lookup Failure (DLF) occurs when the IPADSL module cannot find an entry, within its database, for the incoming Ethernet frame.This selection allows operator to limit the rate of total DLF frames that could be forwarded (e.g. broadcast) by the bridge. Within a second frame, if the total number of DLF frames (including the latest one) is less or equal to the threshold specified by the user, the latest DLF frame shall be forwarded to all ports excluding the one from which the DLF frame is received; if the total number of DLF frames is larger than the threshold specified by the user, the latest DLF frame shall be discarded. (Note that the discarding is counted in bridge discarding PM counter. Value range: 10 - 65535DLF frames per sec. Default: 10 IGMP Snooping IGMP is a protocol used by IP hosts to register their dynamic multicast group membership. The switches uses information in the IGMP packets to determine which segments should receive packets directed to the group address. IGMP snooping allows bridges to monitor IGMP packets and reduces the flooding of IP multicast traffic through the ADSL access line. Value range: Enabled, forward Unknown / Enabled, discard unknown / Disabled Default: Disabled DHCP Option 82 The DHCP relay agent information option (option 82) enables a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay agent to include information about itself when forwarding client-originated DHCP packets to a DHCP server. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other parameter-assignment policies. iAN8K B1000 supports DHCP Option 82 feature on all linecard modules in compliance with IETF RFC3046 with some exceptions as explained above. This feature is enabled/disabled on a per module basis. When enable, packet policing address assignment for DHCP must be checked on. Value range: Enabled / Disabled Default: Disabled IGMP Last Query Count Value range: 0 - 3 Default: 1 IGMP no-response-leave Query Count The number of queries sent by the line modules after a port fails to respond to a router's query. Value range: 1 - 3 Default: 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Enable/disable intercepting PPPoE discovery packets, including PADI, PADO, PADR, and PADS. Upon reception of a PADI or PADR packet sent by the PPPoE client, the Intermediate Agent adds a TAG to the packet sent upstream. The TAG contains the identification of the DSL line on which the PADI or PADR packet was received. Value range: Enabled / Disabled

Test Timeout

This feature is applicable to "IF Testing." Select an IPxDSL module from the tree view and select Test Timeout tab to open Figure 236. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

310

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 236 IPxDSL - Test Timeout Window

PPPoE Snooping

IPxDSL module can snoop the IP address assignment occurred in PPPoE traffic, including both native PPPoE traffic and PPPoE traffic converted from PPPoA. Select an IPxDSL module from the tree view and select PPPoE Snooping tab to open Figure 237. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameter and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Click Reset to reset all counters. Refer to Table 104 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

311

Figure 237 IPxDSL - PPPoE Snooping Window

Table 104 IPxDSL - PPPoE Snooping Table

Field PPPoE IP Assignment Snooping ACK Counter Discard Counter Description Enable / Disable PPPoE IP address snooping The counter for received IPCP ACK messages The counter for discarded IPCP ACK messages

Port Level Configuration

IPxDSL modules supports the following configuration at the port level:

WAN Port xDSL

ADSL Port SHDSL Port Line Status Channel Status Previous Status Status Change Time Info Rate Summary Port Label Bit Loading iSmart CPE
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

312

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

ATM

ATM VC Traffic Profile

Bridge

MAC Address Per Port Packet Policing Forwarding Database ARP Table Flood Limit

IGMP

Authentication Parameter CAC Multicast Group Multicast Host

VLAN

VLAN Ingress Rule VLAN Untag

Access List QoS

Packet Priority Port Based Priority 802.1p Tag

WAN Port

The feature provides basic port information of the WAN port. Expand an IPxDSL module from the tree view and select WAN to open Figure 238. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

313

Figure 238 IPxDSL - WAN - WAN Port Window

xDSL

IPxDSL modules supports the following configuration at port level of DSL port:

ADSL Port SHDSL Port Line Status Channel Status Previous Status Status Change Time Info Rate Summary Port Label Bit Loading iSmart CPE

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

314

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

ADSL Port Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select ADSL to open Figure 239. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 105 for more details. Figure 239 IPxDSL - ADSL - ADSL Port Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

315

Table 105 IPxDSL - ADSL - ADSL Port Table

Field Port Description The index number of the port Value range: 1 - 24 for IPADSL3A/3B. 1-48 for IPADSL6A/6B Administrative State The administrative state of the port. Locked: all configuration is allowed Unlocked: no configuration allowed except adding new ATM VC Default: Locked Operational State The operational state of the port. Value range: Enabled / Disabled Profile Line Standard Power State The profile assigned to the port The line standard assigned to the port The power state of the port

Select a port and click Assign Profile to open Figure 240. Select a profile and click Ok. Figure 240 IPxDSL - ADSL - ADSL Port - Assign Profile Window

Select a port and click Lock / Unlock to lock or unlock the port. Click Test to test the port and click Restore to restore the port. SHDSL Port Expand an IPSHDSL3 module from the tree view and select SHDSL to open Figure 241. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 106 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

316

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 241 IPxDSL - SHDSL - SHDSL Port Window

Table 106 IPxDSL - SHDSL - SHDSL Port Table

Field Port Description The index number of the port Value range: 1 - 24 Profile Administrative State The profile assigned to the port Displays whether the port is locked or unlocked for administrative purposes. Locked: all configuration is allowed Unlocked: no configuration allowed except adding new ATM VC Default: Locked

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

317

Table 106 IPxDSL - SHDSL - SHDSL Port Table

Field Operational State Description The operational state of the port. Value range: Enabled / Disabled Actual rate (kbps) Attainable rate (kbps) The actual rate for the port The possible highest rate for the port

Select a port and click Assign Profile to open Figure 242. Select a profile and click Apply. Figure 242 IPxDSL - SHDSL - SHDSL Port - Assign Profile Window

Select a port and click Lock / Unlock to lock or unlock the port. Click Lock All / Unlock All to lock or unlock all ports. Line Status Expand an IPxDSL module from the tree view and select xDSL. Click Line Status tab to open Figure 243. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 107 for ADSL line status information and refer to Table 108 for SHDSL line status information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

318

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 243 IPxDSL - xDSL - Line Status Window

Table 107 IPxDSL - ADSL - Line Status Table

Parameter ATU-C Parameters Port G944 Vender ID System Vendor ID Version Number Serial Number Status Port Index number G944 Vender ID System Vendor ID Version Number Serial number

Value Range

No Defect Loss Of Frame Loss Of Signal Loss Of Power Loss of Signal Quality Loss Of Link Data Initialization Failure Configuration Initialization Failure Protocol Initialization Failure No Peer ATU Present

SNR margin (dB) Attainable rate (kbps) Output power (dBm)

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

The signal to noise margin in dB on each port The highest possible rate The amount of power output for each ports

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

319

Table 107 IPxDSL - ADSL - Line Status Table

Parameter Attenuation (dB) Spectrum Mask Header Compression Power State Value Range The Attenuation on each port Value range: Normal Value range: On / Off L3: ADSL Port is locked L3-F: ADSL Port is forced into L3 state Value range: L0 / L2 / L3 / L3-F ATU-R Parameters Port Status Port Index number

no Defect loss Of Framing loss Of Signal loss Of Power loss Of Signal Quality

SNR margin (dB) Attenuation (dB) Output power (dBm) Attainable rate (kbps) Vender ID Serial number Version number

The signal to noise margin in dB on each port The Attenuation on each port The amount of power output for each ports The highest possible rate Vendor ID Serial number Version Number

Table 108 IPxDSL - SHDSL - Line Status Table

Parameter Port Type Value Range Port Index number Port type Value range: STU-C / STU-R Current Status

No Defect Power Back Off Device Fault DC Continuity Fault SNR Margin Alarm Loop Attenuation Alarm Loss of Signal Failure Alarm Configuration Initialization Failure Protocol Initialization Failure Neighbor not Present Loopback Active

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

320

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Table 108 IPxDSL - SHDSL - Line Status Table

Parameter SNR margin (dB) Attenuation (dB) Operational State Value Range The signal to noise margin in dB on each port The Attenuation on each port

Channel Status Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select ADSL. Click Channel Status tab to open Figure 244. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 109 for more details. Figure 244 IPxDSL - ADSL - Channel Status Window

Table 109 IPxDSL - ADSL - Channel Status Table

Field Port Description Port index number Value range: 1 - 24 for IPADSL3A/3B, 1 - 48 for IPADSL6A/6B Type Current Tx Rate (Kbps) ATU-C / ATU-R Current transmit rate

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

321

Table 109 IPxDSL - ADSL - Channel Status Table

Field Previous Tx Rate (Kbps) Description Previous transmit rate. The previous transmit rate displays data rate achieved in the last successful training. This value is reset to zero after module reset. For interleaved latency only Value range: 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 ms CRC Block Length The length of the CRC block

Interleave Delay (ms)

Previous Status The ADSL physical port previous information is the ADSL physical port information before its latest operational state transitions from up to down. This helps troubleshooting the cause of ADSL physical port down and a validation of the ADSL loop Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select ADSL Port. Click Previous Status tab to open Figure 245. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 245 IPxDSL - ADSL - Previous Status Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

322

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

The previous status window displays the following information:

ATU-C Status ATU-C Attenuation ATU-C Attenuation ATU-C Output Power ATU-C Attainable Rate ATU-C Line Standard ATU-R SNR Margin ATU-R Output Power ATU-R Attenuation ATU-R Status ATU-R Attainable Rate ATU-R Line Standard

Status Change Time Info Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select ADSL. Click Status Change Time Info tab to open Figure 246. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 110 for more details. Figure 246 IPxDSL - ADSL - Status Change Time Info Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

323

Table 110 IPxDSL - ADSL - Status Change Time Info Table

Field Port Latest Administrative State Change Duration Previous before The Last Operational State Duration Previous Operational State Duration Current State Duration Description Port Index The duration between the latest administrative state change and now The duration between the time of previous before the last operational state change and the time of the last operational state change The duration between the time of current operational state change and the time of the last operational state change The duration between the time of the late operational state change and the current time

Rate Summary Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select ADSL. Click Rate Summary tab to open Figure 247. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 111 for more details. Figure 247 IPxDSL - ADSL - Rate Summary Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

324

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Table 111 IPxDSL - ADSL Rate Summary Table

Field Port Description The number of the port Value range: 1 - 24 for IPADSL3A/3B, 1 - 48 for IPADSL6A/6B Type Attainable Rate Current Rate Previous Rate Value range: ATU-C / ATU-R Attainable rate (kbps) Current rate (kbps) Previous rate (kbps). The previous rate displays data rate achieved in the last successful training. This value is reset to zero after module reset. Configured rate (kbps)

Configured rate

Port Label iAN8K B1000 supports a customized description label to be attached to each port. Expand an IPxDSL module from the tree view and select xDSL. Click Port Label tab to open Figure 248. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 248 IPxDSL - xDSL - Port Label Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

325

Select a port and click Modify in Figure 248 to modify the port. Configure the parameter and click Apply in Figure 249 to take the modification into effect. Figure 249 IPxDSL - xDSL - Port Label - Modify Window

Bit Loading iAN8K B1000 displays the ADSL bit-loading map in graphic format. The graph plots number of bits allocated in each tone for upstream direction and for downstream direction. Up to 1024 bins for downstream and 64 bins for upstream is supported. If the corresponding ADSL port is running in Annex C FBM mode, the graph displays the FEXT bin loading for both upstream and downstream. If the corresponding ADSL port is running in Annex C DBM mode, the graph displays the NEXT bin loading for both upstream and downstream direction in addition to FEXT upstream/downstream bin loading. Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select ADSL Click Bit Loading tab to open Figure 250. Select a Port ID and click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

326

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 250 IPxDSL - ADSL - Bit Loading Window

iSmart This feature configures iSmart feature on specific port(s). iSmart addresses home-port identity issue for PAP-based PPPoE sessions. Home-port refers to the DSL port from which the PPPoE session is originated. In many instances, this information is required by B-RAS (the PPPoE server) to implement features like account binding (bind username-password to particular DSL port). iSmart inserts the home port identity to PAP authentication packet, therefore relays the information to PPPoE server. User can disable (default) and enable the feature at module level. When enabled, the user name option for each DSL port can be configured to one of the following:

Replacement Extension No Modification

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

327

When configured to Replacement, PPPoE PAP Authenticate-Request message (RFC 1134) received from the DSL port is modified as following:

Replace the peer-ID field with "node_id#shelf_id#slot_id#port_id", where node_id is an integer from 1 to 9999, node ID is provisioned by the user. shelf_id is an integer indexed from 1. slot_id is an integer indexed from 1, slot B is indexed as 17 for R1.x system port_id is an integer indexed from 1

When configured to Extension, PPPoE PAP Authenticate-Request message (RFC 1134) received from the DSL port is modified as following:

Replace the peer-ID field with "node_id#shelf_id#slot_id#port_id#old_peer_id", where node_id is an integer from 1 to 9999, node ID is provisioned by the user. shelf_id is an integer indexed from 1. slot_id is an integer indexed from 1, slot B is indexed as 17. port_id is an integer indexed from 1 and old_peer_id is the peer ID field in the original received packet.

When configured to No Modification, PPPoE PAP Authenticate-Request message (RFC 1134) received from the DSL port is not modified. Expand an IPxDSL module from the tree view and select xDSL. Click iSmart tab to open Figure 251. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

328

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 251 IPxDSL - xDSL - iSmart Window

CPE The ILMI Based CPE Management in Customized Filter must be enabled. "Error in retrieving CPE information" is prompted if not enabled. The ILMI PVC is created when ILMI-based CPE management is enabled. Its automatically removed when CPE management is disabled. IPxDSL module allows management system to manage remote ADSL CPE via SNMP. SNMP is carried between ADSL ATU-C and ATU-R over ILMI PVC (VPI 0, VCI 16). Community string is used to differentiate the SNMP message intended for line module and the SNMP message intended for CPE.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

329

The content of the SNMP message is transparent to line module. Line module is only responsible for forwarding SNMP between CPE and management system. Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select ADSL Click CPE tab to open Figure 252. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 112 for more details. Figure 252 IPxDSL - ADSL - CPE Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

330

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Table 112 IPxDSL - ADSL - CPE Table

Field Port CPE Management Description Port index Manageable: when ADSL admin status is UP and CPE remote management capability is supported by remote CPE. Non-manageable: when ADSL admin status is down or when remote management capability is not supported by remote CPE. Value range: Manageable / Not manageable Auto Configuration Local Configuration Index Serial Number Value range: Allowed / Not Allowed Local Configuration Index CPE serial number

Select a port and click Modify to open Figure 253. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Figure 253 IPxDSL - ADSL - CPE - Modify Window

ATM

iAN8K B1000 supports encapsulation layer conversion between PPPoA and PPPoE on line card modules. The PPPoA is compliant with IETF RFC2364 and the PPPoE is compliant with IETF RFC2516. The PPPoA to PPPoE conversion is supported on a per VC basis. Each VC with PPPoA to PPPoE conversion enabled requests its own PPPoE session ID. IPxDSL module supports a maximum of 8 PVCs including the PVC used by CPE management, if any. IPxDSL module supports the following ATM configuration options:

ATM VC Traffic Profile

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

331

ATM VC Expand an IPxDSL module module from the tree view and select ATM to open Figure 254. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 113 for more details. Figure 254 IPxDSL - ATM - ATM VC Window

Table 113 IPxDSL - ATM - ATM VC Encapsulation Table

Multiplexing Setting VC Multiplexing for Bridge PDU VC Multiplexing for PPPoA (convert to PPPoE) LLC Multiplexing for Bridge PDU Displayed Encapsulation Method VC-mux Bridge VC-mux PPPoA LLC-mux Bridge

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

332

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Table 113 IPxDSL - ATM - ATM VC Encapsulation Table

Multiplexing Setting LLC Multiplexing for PPPoA (convert to PPPoE) Displayed Encapsulation Method LLC-mux PPPoA

Auto detection (PPPoA to PPPoE conversion enabled) Based on detection results: or Auto detection (PPPoA to PPPoE conversion disabled)

LLC-mux PPPoA LLC-mux Bridge VC-mux Bridge VC-mux PPPoA Unknown In-detection

LLC- auto detection (PPPoA to PPPoE conversion enabled)

Based on detection results:

LLC-mux PPPoA LLC-mux Bridge Unknown In-detection

Click Add in Figure 254 to create a new entry. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 255. Figure 255 IPxDSL - ATM - ATM VC - Add Window

Select an entry and click Delete in Figure 254 to remove the entry. Traffic Profile Note: Configure the packet priority on WAN port after configure the traffic profiles.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

333

iAN8K B1000 supports traffic management profile on each DSL channel. One channel is supported for each DSL port. By default, the default profile, tm-default, is assigned to all ports. Refer to Table 114 for more details. Table 114 IPxDSL - Traffic Profile - Modification Table
TM profile is assigned port adm (locked/unlocked) re-assign? modify? deleted? TM profile is not assigned port adm (locked/unlocked) re-assign? modify? deleted? yes yes yes port ops (up/down) yes yes yes yes no no port ops (up/down) yes no no

Expand an IPxDSL module. Select ATM VC and click Traffic Profile tab to open Figure 256. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

334

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 256 IPxDSL - ATM - Traffic Profile Window

Select a port and click Assign Profile to assign traffic profile in Figure 257. Select the profile and click Ok to apply the profile. Note: Refer to Profile Menu - Traffic Management Profile for profile configuration.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

335

Figure 257 IPxDSL - ATM - Traffic Profile - Assign Profile Window

Bridge

Refer to the following sections for Bridge configuration:

MAC Address Per Port Packet Policing Forwarding Database ARP Table Flood Limit

MAC Address Per Port The IPxDSL module can limit the number of MAC addresses learnt at each IPxDSL port. If the number of MAC addresses learnt has reached the limit defined, any incoming packets with unknown MAC addresses are discarded. When learning is disabled, the source MAC address of received packet is not added to the forwarding database. The static entry added to a bridge port is not counted towards the number of MAC address learnt on each xDSL port. Expand an IPxDSL module and select Bridge and to open Figure 258. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 115 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

336

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 258 IPxDSL - Bridge - MAC Address Per Port Window

Table 115 IPxDSL - Bridge - MAC Address Per Port Table

Field Port MAC Address Limit Description Port index The number source MAC addresses allowed to learn at each port Value range: 0 - 10 / Infinite / Disable learning Default: 2

Select a port and click Modify in Figure 258 to modify the port. Configure the parameter and click Apply in Figure 259 to take the modification into effect.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

337

Figure 259 IPxDSL - Bridge - MAC Address Per Port - Modify Window

Packet Policing Packet Policing comprises of 2 protocol filters.

ARP Filter:

When enabled, the IPxDSL module monitors the ARP request/reply packets on all ADSL ports uplink traffic. The ARP packet is discarded unless its sender protocol address matches any of the IP address assigned to this ADSL port or it is 0.0.0.0. The packet discard counter for that bridge port is increased accordingly. When enabled, the IPxDSL module monitors the ARP request/reply packets received from PVC-based bridge port. The ARP packet is discarded if its target protocol address matches any of the IP address assigned to this port. The packet discard counter for that bridge port is increased accordingly.

IP source address Filter: When source address enforcement is enabled, the IPxDSL module snoops the uplink traffic on all ADSL port. If the packet is an IP packet with source IP address matching one of the IP addresses assigned to its ADSL port, or if the source IP address is 0.0.0.0, the packet is forwarded normally, otherwise the IP packet is discarded. Non-IP packets are forwarded normally. If no IP address has been assigned to the ADSL port, only packet with source address as 0.0.0.0 is forwarded.

Packet Policing Setup Expand an IPxDSL module. Select Bridge and click Packet Policing tab to open Figure 260. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Refer to Table 116 for more information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

338

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 260 IPxDSL - Bridge - Packet Policing - Packet Policing Setup Window

Table 116 IPxDSL - Bridge - Packet Policing - Packet Policing Setup Table
Field ADSL Port Protocol Filter ARP When ARP enforcement is enabled IPADSL module monitors the ARP request/reply packets on all ADSL port uplink traffic. The ARP packet is discarded unless its "sender protocol address" matches any of the IP address assigned to this ADSL port or it is 0.0.0.0. The packet discard counter for that bridge port is increased. When source address enforcement is enabled, the IPADSL module snoops the uplink traffic on all ADSL port. If the packet's source IP address matches one of the IP address assigned to its ADSL port, or if the source IP address is 0.0.0.0, the packet is forwarded, otherwise the IP packet is discarded. Non-IP packets are forwarded normally. If no IP address has been assigned to the ADSL port, only packet with source address as 0.0.0.0 are forwarded The IPADSL module has an internal database tracking the legitimate IP addresses assigned to each ADSL port. With the DHCP option database entry is dynamically created by the DHCP tracking feature. This is also used to add in DHCP option 82 information.The dynamically DHCP assigned entries are shown as "Dynamic" entries. The IPADSL module has an internal database tracking the legitimate IP addresses assigned to each ADSL port. The manually entered IP addresses are displayed in the table as "Static" entries. Description Select the appropriate ADSL Port for packet policing setup.

IP

IP Address Assignment DHCP

Static

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

339

IP Address Summary Expand an IPxDSL module. Select Bridge and click Packet Policing tab. Select to IP Address Summary tab to open Figure 261. Refer to Table 117 for more details. Figure 261 IPxDSL - Bridge - Packet Policing IP Address Summary Window

Table 117 IPxDSL - Bridge - Packet Policing IP Address Summary Table

Field Name Port IP Address Type Description Port ID number. IP address of the port. Port Type Value range: Static / Dynamic

Click Add to create a new entry. Select an entry and and click Delete to remove the entry. Forwarding Database IPxDSL module supports semi-static forwarding database feature. When flush on port down is enabled, dynamic entries in forwarding database are not aged out based on aging timer. The dynamic entries are only flushed out when bridge
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

340

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

port becomes operationally disabled (that is when underline xDSL port or WAN port goes down). When flush on port lock is enabled, dynamic entries in forwarding database are not aged out based on aging timer nor flushed out when bridge port becomes operationally disabled (that is when underline xDSL port or WAN port goes down). The dynamic entries are flushed out only when corresponding DSL port is administratively locked. For both cases, the incoming Ethernet packet is discard if its source MAC address existed in forwarding database under a bridge port different from the port it is received from. In Shared VLAN Learning (SVL) scenario, each FWDB entry is distinguished by MAC address. In Independent VLAN Learning (IVL) scenario, each FWDB entry is distinguished by the combination of MAC address and VLAN ID. That is for IVL, if same MAC address were learnt in two separate VLANs, they are counted as two entries for MAC address per port purpose. Expand an IPxDSL module. Select Bridge and click Forwarding Database tab to open Figure 262. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 118 for more details. Figure 262 IPxDSL - Bridge - Forwarding Database Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

341

Table 118 IPxDSL - Bridge - Forwarding Database Table

Field Name VLAN ID Type Description VLAN ID number Static - Created by user. Does not get flushed out Dynamic - Created automatically and gets flushed out based on the configuration MAC address Port Destination MAC Address (L2 info.) WAN Port or ADSL Ports where the MAC address in consideration is active. (L1 info.)

Select a VLAN from the VLAN ID drop down menu to display the corresponding entry for the VLAN selected. Click Add in Figure 262 to create a new entry. Configure the parameters and click Apply in Figure 263. Refer to Table 119 for more details. Figure 263 IPxDSL - Forwarding Database - Add Window

Table 119 IPxDSL - Forwarding Database - Add Table

Field VLAN Unicast MAC Address Description VLAN ID. Source MAC Address (L2 info.) Value range: valid MAC address Forwarding Port To discard or forward packets for designated destination MAC address Value range: Discard / WAN Port / ADSL Port

Select a static entry from Figure 262 and click Delete to remove the entry. Note: Only static FDB entries may be deleted.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

342

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

ARP Table Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) provides information on the mapping between subscriber's IP address and MAC address. It is implemented by snooping the ARP traffic passing through the module. Unlike the ARP table used by any IP host, which always provides the up-to-date ARP mapping by sending and receiving ARP packets, the iAN8K B1000 ARP table provides a history of snooping results. Entries are not aged out. Each entry is uniquely identified by the MAC address filed and the content of the entry remains current so long as the device owning the MAC address remains active. The entry stays in the table after the device becomes inactive. Operators can reset the table to obtain a snapshot of active subscriber and flush out such inactive entries. These entries are information only and do not effect packet forwarding. This approach not only simplifies the implementation, but it also allows the operator to view the history information for those users who were active on the module and then became in-active at the time the table is viewed. The size of ARP table is limited to 100 entries. If the table overflows, new entry overwrites old entries by the rule of "first in first out." Expand an IPxDSL module. Select Bridge and click ARP Table tab to open Figure 264. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Click Reset to reset all the statistics. Refer to Table 120 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

343

Figure 264 IPxDSL - Bridge - ARP Table Window

Table 120 IPxDSL - Bridge - ARP Table

Field Port IP Address MAC Address Description The bridge port index number The IP address of a subscriber The MAC address of a subscriber

Flood Limit When broadcast rate limit or multicast rate limit is provisioned to a value, IPxDSL modules count the incoming broadcast packets for each bridge port (exclude WAN port) in every given 1-second period. Incoming packets within the provisioned limit are forwarded and incoming packets exceed the provisioned limit are discarded. Packets discarded are counted in the Incoming packets discard parameter on the port from which the discarded packet was received. Expand an IPxDSL module. Select Bridge and click Flood Limit tab to open Figure 265. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

344

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 265 IPxDSL - Bridge - Flood Limit Window

IGMP

Refer to the following section for IGMP configuration:

Authentication Parameter CAC Multicast Group Multicast Host

Authentication Parameter This feature applies for video service. Expand an IPxDSL module and select IGMP and to open Figure 266. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

345

Figure 266 IPxDSL - IGMP - Authentication Parameters Window

Select an entry and click Modify. Configure the parameter and click Apply in Figure 267. Figure 267 IPxDSL - IGMP - Authentication Parameters - Modify Window

CAC iAN8K B1000 reserves band width for other traffic if oversubscription threshold input less than 100%.
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

346

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Expand an IPxDSL module. Select IGMP and click CAC tab to open Figure 256. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Modify the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Figure 268 IPxDSL - IGMP - CAC Window

Multicast Group Expand an IPxDSL module. Select IGMP and click Multicast Group tab to open Figure 269. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 121 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

347

Figure 269 IPxDSL - IGMP - Multicast Group Window

Table 121 IPxDSL - IGMP - Multicast Group Table

Field Name IP Address VLAN ID Port Description IP address of a multicast group. VLAN ID number. Port ID number.

Multicast Host Expand an IPxDSL module. Select IGMP and click Multicast Host tab to open Figure 270. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 122 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

348

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 270 IPxDSL - IGMP - Multicast Host Window

Table 122 IPxDSL - IGMP - Multicast Host Table

Field Name IP Address VLAN ID Port Host IP Address Description IP address of a multicast group. VLAN ID number. Port ID number. IP address of a multicast host.

VLAN

VLAN is a networking technology that allows networks to be segmented logically. With VLAN the logical topology is independent of the physical topology of the network nodes. This isolation reduces unnecessary traffic flooding and leads to better network performance. The highlights of VLAN feature on iAN8K B1000 are:

Supports up to 256 Virtual LANs (VLANs). Each VLAN has a VLAN name, a VLAN ID and a list of bridge ports that are in the VLAN. A bridge port can be placed in one and only one VLAN as un-tagged port. However a bridge port is allowed in multiple VLANs as a tagged port. Within each VLAN, the IPxDSL module supports user isolation feature. When enabled, packets received from ADSL port are not forwarded to any other ADSL port. When disabled, packets received from ADSL port are forwarded

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

349

normally (e.g. based on bridge forwarding database and VLAN configuration).

When a VLAN is deleted, all untagged bridge ports originally assigned to the VLAN return to default VLAN as untagged port, the tagged ports are removed, and Netman provides a warning for the delete action.

The VLAN association of incoming packets is determined by, in the order of:

802.1q tag, if tagged. Incoming packets with VLAN ID set as 0 is considered as untagged packets. VLAN of which the incoming port is associated with as untagged port, if packets are un-tagged.

If an incoming packet is tagged with a unknown VLAN tag, IPxDSL modules always discard these packets. If an incoming packet is tagged with a VLAN for which the port is not provisioned to be part of, the IPxDSL modules allow user to configure the ingress rule to decide whether to discard the packet or to forward the packet based on the tag. Ingress rule could be configured for each bridge port. The valid options are:

Admit only configured VLAN Admit all VLAN (default)

Refer to the following for VLAN configuration:

VLAN Ingress Rule VLAN Untag

VLAN Expand an IPxDSL module and select VLAN and to open Figure 271. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

350

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 271 IPxDSL - VLAN - VLAN Window

Click Add or select a port and click Modify in Figure 271. Figure 272 prompts for VLAN configuration. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

351

Figure 272 IPxDSL - VLAN - VLAN - Add Window

Select a port and click Delete in Figure 271 to remove the entry, Ingress Rule Expand an IPxDSL module. Select VLAN and click Ingress Rule tab to open Figure 273. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

352

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 273 IPxDSL - VLAN - Ingress Rule Window

Select a port and click Modify in Figure 273. Figure 274 prompts for VLAN configuration. Configure the parameters and click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Figure 274 IPxDSL - VLAN - Ingress Rule - Modify Window

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

353

VLAN Untag Expand an IPxDSL module. Select VLAN and click VLAN Untag tab to open Figure 275. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Figure 275 IPxDSL - VLAN - VLAN Untag Window

Select a port and click the Enable or Disable radio button to enable or disable VLAN untag. Click Apply to bring the modification into effect. Access List IP-iAN8K B1000 supports maximum of 512 ACL entries on the node. Expand an IPxDSL module and select Access List to open Figure 276. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

354

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 276 IPxDSL - Access List Window

Select a port and click Edit in Figure 276. Figure 277 prompts for the inbound access list profile configuration. Click Outbound tab to configure for outbound access list.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

355

Figure 277 IPxDSL - Access List - Edit Window

Click Up/Down in Figure 277 to adjust the priority order of the profiles. Click New in Figure 277 to open access list profiles. Select a profile and click OK in Figure 278 to confirm. Click Apply in Figure 277 to bring the modification into effect.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

356

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Figure 278 IPxDSL - Access List - Edit - New Window

Note: After applying customized access list profiles to the ports, the user must create and apply another access list profile that admits all packets. Applying this access list profile will grant access permission to all other packets. Note: Apply command takes modification into effect immediately. However, it does not save the modification. Before exiting device manager, the user must save the modification with Save Configuration command in order to keep the modification for future usage QoS IPxDSL modules support traffic prioritization based on the following user-configurable classification criteria:

Diffserv code point (DSCP) (bit 0 to bit 5 of TOS byte) TOS bits (bit 3 to bit 6 of TOS byte) Ether type 8021.q tag (VLAN ID) Source IP address, Destination IP address IP Protocol type Source TCP port Source UDP port Destination TCP port Destination UDP port

Priority queuing is supported to expedite forwarding of higher priority packets. The priority queuing is handled based on the priority of incoming packets determined by classifying the packets, applying pre-assigned priority on the
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

357

receiving ports, or inspecting the 802.1p tagged priority of the packets, queuing to the appropriate queue based on assigned priority and dispatching the packet from the queue. There are 8 upstream priorities (0 - 7) and 4 downstream priority queues (traffic classes) (0 - 3) in the line card modules. The packet is placed into proper egress queue based on the priority assigned on packet per "priority to traffic class mapping " table specified in Table 8-2 of IEEE 802.1Q. The table has been extracted below for convenience. For traffic queued at the WAN port (Upstream Traffic) column with 8 traffic classes is applied. For traffic queued on the ADSL port (Downstream Traffic), column with 4 traffic classes is applied. Table 123 IPxDSL- QoS - Recommended User Priority to Traffic Class Mappings
Number of Available Traffic Classes 1 0 (Default) 1 User Priority 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 4 1 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 5 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 4 6 1 0 0 2 3 4 5 5 7 1 0 0 2 3 4 5 6 8 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7

The rationale behind the choice of values shown in this table is discussed in Annex H.2 of ISO/IEC 15802-3. A consequence of the mapping shown is that frames carrying the default user priority are given preferential treatment relative to user priority 1 and 2 in Bridges that implement four or more traffic classes.

If multiple user rules are applied, the first match determines packet priority. User can arrange rule orders on bridge port. If none of the above prioritization criteria is applicable (when no user rule is configured; port-based is disabled and incoming packet is not 802.1p tagged), packet is assigned to priority 0. The line card module supports scheduling with strict priority queuing. Packets are retrieved from queues for egress transmission based on the strict order of queue priority. For upstream traffic, a configuration parameter can be used to enable/disable the marking of the 802.1p tag. When 802.1p tag marking is enabled, every

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

358

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

packet on the WAN outbound traffic has to be forwarded with an 802.1p tag value set according to the following mapping: Table 124 IPxDSL - QoS - 802.1p Tag Marking on Line Card
Queue index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Marked 802.1p Tag Value 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7

The line card DSL ports can be configured with a fixed line rate mode for support of rate limiting on a per port basis. The line rates can be configured with minimum rate and maximum rate for both upstream and downstream directions. The fixed line rates enforce an upper bandwidth ceiling on all the traffic passing through the ports. This mechanism is applied with the assumption that every port, as a result of its auto-negotiation, can achieve higher bandwidth than the intended maximum line rate. IPxDSL modules support strict priority based scheduling mechanism. Refer to the following section for IPADSL3/3A/3B and IPSHDSL3 QoS configuration:

Packet Priority Port Based Priority 802.1p Tag

Packet Priority Expand an IPxDSL module and select QoS to open Figure 279. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

359

Figure 279 IPxDSL - QoS - Packet Priority Window

Select a port and click Edit in Figure 279. Figure 280 prompts for rule index selection. Select the rule and click Apply to confirm. Figure 280 IPxDSL - QoS - Packet Priority - Edit Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

360

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

Click Add in Figure 280 and Figure 281 prompts for rule addition. Select the rule and click Ok to add the rules. Figure 281 IPxDSL - QoS - Packet Priority - Edit - Add Window

Port Based Priority IPxDSL module supports port-based priority for ADSL ports. When enabled, user can provision a priority (0-7) for each PVC-based bridge port. The priority of the packet received from PVC-based bridge port is assigned as the priority provisioned for the incoming port. Expand an IPxDSL module. Select QoS and click the Port Based Priority to open Figure 282. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

361

Figure 282 IPxDSL - QoS - Port Based Priority Window

Select a port and click Edit in Figure 282. Figure 283 prompts for priority selection. Select the priority and click Apply to confirm. Figure 283 IPxDSL - QoS - Port Based Priority - Modify Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

362

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

802.1p Tag IPxDSL modules support re-generation of the 802.1p tag. When enabled, the module regenerate the 802.1p tag for packets received from ADSL port. The new 802.1p tag value is set to the priority value assigned to the packet by the line module. The tag regeneration only tries to overwrite the packet received from ADSL port, not the packet received from WAN port. The packets received from ADSL port can be transmitted out via WAN port or via ADSL port. In both scenarios, its priority tag will be regenerated. The 802.1p tag operations are listed in Table 125: Table 125 IPxDSL - QoS - Port Based Priority - Tag Operation Table
Incoming Port ADSL port ADSL port WAN port WAN port ADSL port ADSL port Any port Any port Destination Port WAN port WAN port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port Any Port Any port Outgoing Port VLAN Tag Configuration Outgoing 802.1p tag tagged untagged tagged untagged tagged untagged tagged untagged Contain 802.1p tag, tag value is the priority of the packet No 802.1p tag Contain 802.1p tag, tag value is the same as incoming packet's priority tag (0, if incoming packet is untagged) No 802.1p tag Contain 802.1p tag, tag value is the priority of the packet No 802.1p tag Contain 802.1p tag, tag value is the same as incoming packet's priority tag (0, if incoming packet is untagged) No 802.1p tag

Expand an IPxDSL module. Select QoS and click the 802.1p Tag to open Figure 284. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameter and click Apply to bring the modification into effect.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Port Level Configuration

363

Figure 284 IPxDSL - QoS - 802.1p Tag Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

364

Chapter 7: Provisioning - IPxDSL Module

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT

Performance Management supports monitoring statistical performance counters for the Bridge ports, Ethernet and ADSL interfaces in iAN8K B1000 system. Figure 285 shows the main window of the Performance management. Figure 285 Performance Management Main Window

iAN8K B1000 supports performance management for the following modules:

ICM3 Module IPADSLx Module IPSHDSL3 Module

Note: Both physical and virtual boards are displayed in the tree view of the performance section. However, only the physical boards contains meaningful data. The report for all virtual boards displays null or 0 value in the fields.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

366

Chapter 8: Performance Management

ICM3 Module

The ICM3 module supports the following statistical counters reports for each port including Internal 1 - 16, FE1 - 4 and GE1 - 2.

Ethernet PM

General Counters Error Counters Traffic Load

Bridge PM

Control 5 Minutes Report 15 Minutes Report

The performance management allows user to reset the Ethernet counters on an individual Ethernet port or on all the Ethernet ports. The counter resets under the following conditions:

User manually resets the counters for the port User administratively locks the port (Internal ports are never administratively locked. Therefore the counters can only be reset manually by the user).

Note: All counters are free run counters and the counter value wraps after exceeding the limit (32 bit value). Ethernet PM ICM3 module supports the following Ethernet performance reports:

General Counters Error Counters Traffic Load

General Counters Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and select Ethernet PM to open Figure 286. Select a port and click Reset to reset the counts for a specific port. Click Reset All to reset all counts for all ports. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 126 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

ICM3 Module

367

Figure 286 ICM3 - Ethernet PM- General Counters

Table 126 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - General Counters Table

Field Port ID Rx total octets Rx unicast frames Rx multicast frames Rx broadcast frames Rx pause frames Tx total octets Tx unicast frames Tx multicast frames Tx broadcast frames Description Internal 1 - Internal 16 / FE 1 - FE 4 / GE 1 - GE 2 Counter of total octets for incoming traffic Counter of unicast frames for incoming traffic Counter of multicast frames for incoming traffic Counter of broadcast frames for incoming traffic Counter of pause frames for incoming traffic Counter of total octets for outgoing traffic Counter of unicast frames for outgoing traffic Counter of multicast frames for outgoing traffic Counter of broadcast frames for outgoing traffic

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

368

Chapter 8: Performance Management

Table 126 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - General Counters Table

Field Tx pause frames Rx 64 bytes Rx 65 to 127 bytes Rx 128 to 255 bytes Rx 256 to 511 bytes Rx 512 to 1023 bytes Rx 1024 to 1518 bytes Description Counter of pause frames for outgoing traffic Counter of 64 bytes for incoming traffic Counter of 65 to 127 bytes for incoming traffic Counter of 128 to 255 bytes for incoming traffic Counter of R256 to 511 bytes for incoming traffic Counter of 512 to 1023 bytes for incoming traffic Counter of 1024 to 1518 bytes for incoming traffic

Error Counters Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and select Ethernet PM. Click Error Counters tab to open Figure 287. Select a port and click Reset to reset the counts for a specific port. Click Reset All to reset all counts for all ports. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 127 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

ICM3 Module

369

Figure 287 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - Error Counters

Table 127 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - Error Counters Table

Parameter Port ID Rx Undersize Frames Rx Oversize Frames Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Frames Rx FCS Error Frames Rx Alignment Error Frames Value Range Internal 1 - Internal 16 / FE 1 - FE 4 / GE 1 - GE 2 Counter of undersize frames for incoming traffic Counter of oversize frames for incoming traffic Counter of fragments for incoming traffic Counter of jabber frames for incoming traffic Counter of FCS error frames for incoming traffic Counter of alignment error frames for incoming traffic

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

370

Chapter 8: Performance Management

Traffic Load Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and select Ethernet PM. Click Traffic Load tab to open Figure 288. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 128 for more details. Figure 288 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - Traffic Load

Table 128 ICM3 - Ethernet PM - Traffic Load Table

Parameter Port ID Traffic Load (kbps) Traffic Load (%) Value Range Internal 1 - Internal 16 / FE 1 - FE 4 / GE 1 - GE 2 Traffic load in kbps Traffic load

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

ICM3 Module

371

Bridge PM

ICM3 module supports the following Bridge performance reports:

Control 5 Minutes Report 15 Minutes Report

Control Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and select Bridge PM to open Figure 289. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Refer to Table 129 for more details. Figure 289 ICM3 - Bridge PM - Control

Table 129 ICM3 - Bridge PM - Control Table

Parameter Bridge Port 5 Minutes PM Monitoring Bridge Port 15 Minutes PM Monitoring History Capacity Value Range Disable / enable 5 minutes performance monitoring for the bridge port Disable / enable 15 minutes performance monitoring for the bridge port History buffer size

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

372

Chapter 8: Performance Management

5 Minutes Report Expand the active ICM3 module from the tree view and select Bridge PM. Click 5 Minutes Report tab to open Figure 290. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Click Reset to reset the statistics listed in the Current Interval section. Previous Intervals section lists the history statistics. Refer to Table 130 for more details. Figure 290 ICM3 - Bridge PM - 5 Minutes Report

Table 130 ICM3 - Bridge PM - 5 Minutes Report Table

Parameter Port List Time Elapse / End Time Valid Incoming Octets Incoming unicast frames Value Range Internal 1 - Internal 16 / FE 1 - FE 4 / GE 1 - GE 2 Period of time for collecting the error Validation of the data The number of octets that have been received by the bridge port from its segment The number of unicast packets received from this bridge segment

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPADSLx Module

373

Table 130 ICM3 - Bridge PM - 5 Minutes Report Table

Parameter Incoming multicast frames Incoming broadcast frames Outgoing Octets Outgoing unicast frames Outgoing multicast frames Outgoing broadcast frames Value Range The number of multicast packets received from this bridge segment The number of broadcast packets received from this bridge segment The number of octets that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. The number of unicast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment The number of multicast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment The number of broadcast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment

15 Minutes Report 15 Minutes Report shares identical parameters with 5 Minutes Report. Please refer to 5 Minutes Report for more details.

IPADSLx Module

IPADSLx modules support the following performance reports:

ATM PVC Bridge Port

Bridge PM Control Bridge 5 Minutes Report 15 Minutes Report

WAN Port

Threshold Controls 15 Minutes 24 Hours

ADSL Port

ADSL 15 Minutes Summary ADSL 24 Hours Summary Threshold Controls ATUC 15 Minutes ATUC 24 Hours ATUR 15 Minutes ATUR 24 Hours Channel Level
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

374

Chapter 8: Performance Management

ATM PVC

Select an IPADSLx module from the tree view to open ATM PVC report shown in Figure 291. Select a port and click Reset to reset the counters for the port. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest performance report. Refer to Table 131 for more details. Figure 291 IPADSLx - ATM PVC

Table 131 IPADSLx - ATM PVC Table

Parameter Port VPI VCI Cells Received Cells Transmitted Cells Received Dropped Description Port type: Bridge port / WAN port / ADSL port VPI value VCI value Number of ATM cells received on PVC, not including idle cells and OAM cells Number of ATM cells transmitted on PVC, not including idle cells and OAM cells Number of cells received and dropped.

Bridge Port

IPADSLx modules support the following performance reports for Bridge port:

Bridge PM Control Bridge 5 Minutes Report

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPADSLx Module

375

15 Minutes Report

Bridge PM Control Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select Bridge Port to open Figure 292. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Refer to Table 132 for more details. Figure 292 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - Bridge PM Control

Table 132 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - Bridge PM Control Table

Parameter Bridge Port 5 Minutes PM Monitoring Bridge Port 15 Minutes PM Monitoring History Capacity Value Range Disable / enable 5 minutes performance monitoring for the bridge port Disable / enable 15 minutes performance monitoring for the bridge port History buffer size

Bridge Select a IPADSLx module from the tree view to view the bridge report shown in Figure 293. Refer to Table 133 for more details. Select a port and click Reset Counter to reset the counters for a specific port. Click Reset All Counters to reset all counters for all ports. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest performance report.
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

376

Chapter 8: Performance Management

Figure 293 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - Bridge

Table 133 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - Bridge Table

PM Parameter Port VPI:VCI Incoming Octets Outgoing Octets Incoming frames Outgoing frames Incoming discard frames Incoming unicast frames Incoming multicast frames Incoming broadcast frames Outgoing unicast frames Outgoing multicast frames Outgoing broadcast frames Description Port type. WAN port or ADSL port VPI, VCI values The number of octets that have been received by the bridge port from its segment The number of octets that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. The number of frames that have been received by the bridge port from its segment. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment The number of valid frames received from this bridge segment and are discarded by the forwarding process and the filtering process The number of unicast packets received from this bridge segment The number of multicast packets received from this bridge segment The number of broadcast packets received from this bridge segment The number of unicast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment The number of multicast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment The number of broadcast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment

Note: All counters are 32 bits long except incoming/outgoing octets counters are 64 bit long.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPADSLx Module

377

Note: All counters in Bridge report are automatically reset after the ADSL line is reset or re-trained. 5 Minutes Report Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select Bridge Port. Click 5 Minutes Report tab to open Figure 294. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Click Reset to reset the statistics listed in the Current Interval section. Previous Intervals section lists the history statistics. Refer to Table 134 for more details. Figure 294 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - 5 Minutes Report

Table 134 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - 5 Minutes Report Table

Parameter Port List Time Elapse / End Time Valid Incoming Octets Incoming unicast frames Incoming multicast frames Incoming broadcast frames Outgoing Octets Value Range Port list Period of time for collecting the error Validation of the data The number of octets that have been received by the bridge port from its segment The number of unicast packets received from this bridge segment The number of multicast packets received from this bridge segment The number of broadcast packets received from this bridge segment The number of octets that have been transmitted by this port to its segment.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

378

Chapter 8: Performance Management

Table 134 IPADSLx - Bridge Port - 5 Minutes Report Table

Parameter Outgoing unicast frames Outgoing multicast frames Outgoing broadcast frames Value Range The number of unicast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment The number of multicast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment The number of broadcast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment

15 Minutes Report 15 Minutes Report shares identical parameters with 5 Minutes Report. Please refer to 5 Minutes Report for more details. WAN Port IPADSLx modules support the following performance reports for WAN port:

Threshold Controls 15 Minutes 24 Hours

Threshold Controls Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select WAN Port to open Figure 295. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Refer to Table 135 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPADSLx Module

379

Figure 295 IPADSLx - WAN Port - Thresholds Control

Table 135 IPADSLx - WAN Port - Thresholds Control Table

Field Profile Name Alignment Error CRC Error Description The Name of the profile selected. Count of frames received on a particular interface that is not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check. Count of frames received on a particular interface that is an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error. Count of frames received on a particular interface that exceeds the maximum permitted frame size. Count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by collision.

Oversize Frame Collision

15 Minutes Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and select WAN Port. Click the 15 Minutes tab to open Figure 296.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

380

Chapter 8: Performance Management

Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Click Reset Counters to reset the statistics listed in the Current Interval section. Previous Intervals section lists the history statistics. Refer to Table 136 for more details. Figure 296 IPADSLx - WAN Port - 15 Minutes

Table 136 IPADSLx - WAN Port - 15 Minutes Table

Field PM Monitoring Description Enabled or Disabled. Read-only. Port Admin State Locked or Unlocked. Read-only. Time Elapsed Alignment Error CRC Error Period of time for collecting the error Count of frames received on a particular interface that is not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check. Count of frames received on a particular interface that is an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPADSLx Module

381

Table 136 IPADSLx - WAN Port - 15 Minutes Table

Field Oversize Frame Collision Previous Intervals Description Count of frames received on a particular interface that exceeds the maximum permitted frame size. Count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by collision. History of the performance report

24 Hours 24 Hours report shares identical parameters with 15 Minutes report. Please refer to 15 Minutes for more details. ADSL Port IPADSLx modules support the following performance reports for ADSL port:

ADSL 15 Minutes Summary ADSL 24 Hours Summary Threshold Controls ATUC 15 Minutes ATUC 24 Hours ATUR 15 Minutes ATUR 24 Hours Channel Level

ADSL 15 Minutes Summary Select a IPADSLx module from the tree view and click the ADSL 15 Minutes Summary tab to view the 15 minutes summary shown in Figure 297. Select a port and click Reset 15 Minutes Current Counter to reset the counts for a specific port. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest performance report. Refer to Table 137 for more information.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

382

Chapter 8: Performance Management

Figure 297 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ADSL 15 Minutes Summary

Table 137 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ADSL 15 Minutes Summary Table

Parameters Port LOF - Loss of Frame Description ADSL port ID number This parameter is a count of 1-second intervals with loss of frames. Applicable for IPADSL3x modules only. LOS - Loss of Signal This parameter is a count of 1-second intervals with loss of signal. Applicable for IPADSL3x modules only. LOL - Loss of Link This parameter is a count of 1-second intervals with loss of link. Applicable for IPADSL3x modules only. ES - Errored Seconds This parameter is a count of 1-second intervals with:

one or more CRC-8 anomalies one or more LOS defects one or more SEF defects one or more LPR defects

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPADSLx Module

383

Table 137 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ADSL 15 Minutes Summary Table

Parameters SES - Severely Errored Seconds Description This parameter is a count of 1-second intervals with:

18 or more CRC-8 anomalies one or more LOS defects one or more SEF defects one or more LPR defects.

UAS - Unavailable Seconds

This parameter is a count of 1-second intervals for which the ADSL line is unavailable. The ADSL line becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous SES-Ls. The 10 SES-Ls are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the ADSL line becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-Ls. The 10 seconds with no SES-Ls are excluded from unavailable time. This parameter is a count of 1-second intervals with loss of power

LPR - Loss of Power

ADSL 24 Hours Summary ADSL 24 Hours Summary shares identical parameters with ADSL 15 Minutes Summary. Please refer to ADSL 15 Minutes Summary for more details. Threshold Controls Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and expand ADSL Port. Select an ADSL Port # to open Figure 298. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Configure the parameters and click Apply to take the modification into effect. Refer to Table 138 for more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

384

Chapter 8: Performance Management

Figure 298 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - Thresholds Control

Table 138 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - Thresholds Control Table

Field Profile Name Alignment Error CRC Error Description The Name of the profile selected. Count of frames received on a particular interface that is not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check. Count of frames received on a particular interface that is an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error. Count of frames received on a particular interface that exceeds the maximum permitted frame size. Count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by collision.

Oversize Frame Collision

ATUC 15 Minutes All ATUC/ATUR 15 minutes and 24 hours performance reports share identical parameters. Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and expand ADSL Port. Select an ADSL Port # and click the ATUC 15 Minutes tab to open Figure 299. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 139 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPADSLx Module

385

Figure 299 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ATUC 15 Minutes

Table 139 IPADSLx - ADSL Port - ATUC 15 Minutes Table

Field PM Monitoring Description Enabled or Disabled. Read-only. Port Admin State Locked or Unlocked. Read-only. Time Elapsed / End Time Valid LOF - Loss of Frame LOS - Loss of Signal LOL - Loss of Link ES - Errored Seconds SES - Severely Errored Seconds UAS - Unavailable Seconds Previous Intervals Period of time for collecting the error Yes or No Count of loss of frame Count of loss of signal Count of loss of link Count of errored seconds Count of severely errored seconds Count of unavailable seconds History record of the performance report

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

386

Chapter 8: Performance Management

ATUC 24 Hours ATUC 24 Hours report shares identical parameters with ATUC 15 Minutes report. Please refer to ATUC 15 Minutes more details. ATUR 15 Minutes ATUR 15 Minutes report shares identical parameters with ATUC 15 Minutes report. Please refer to ATUC 15 Minutes more details. ATUR 24 Hours ATUR 24 Hours report shares identical parameters with ATUC 15 Minutes report. Please refer to ATUC 15 Minutes more details. Channel Level IPADSLx modules support the following channel performance reports for ADSL port:

Downstream 15 Minutes Downstream 24 Hours Upstream 15 Minutes Upstream 24 Hours

Downstream 15 Minutes All downstream/upstream 15 minutes and 24 hours performance reports share identical parameters. Expand an IPADSLx module from the tree view and expand ADSL Port. Expand an ADSL Port # and select Channel to open Figure 300. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest information. Refer to Table 140 for more details.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPADSLx Module

387

Figure 300 IPADSLx - Channel - Downstream 15 Minutes

Table 140 IPADSLx - Channel - Downstream 15 Minutes Table

Field Time Elapsed / End Time Valid Tx Blocks Rx Blocks Corrected Blocks Un-corrected Blocks Description Period of time for collecting the error Yes or No. Count of Transmitted Blocks Count of Received Blocks Count of blocks received with error that are corrected Count of blocks received with un-correctable errors

Downstream 24 Hours Downstream 24 Hours report shares identical parameters with Downstream 15 Minutes report. Please refer to Downstream 15 Minutes more details. Upstream 15 Minutes Upstream 15 Minutes report shares identical parameters with Downstream 15 Minutes report. Please refer to Downstream 15 Minutes more details. Upstream 24 Hours Upstream 24 Hours report shares identical parameters with Downstream 15 Minutes report. Please refer to Downstream 15 Minutes more details.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

388

Chapter 8: Performance Management

IPSHDSL3 Module

IPSHDSL3 modules support slot level performance report, which is the Bridge performance report. Select a IPSHDSL3 module from the tree view to view the bridge report shown in Figure 301. Refer to Table 141 for more details. Figure 301 IPSHDSL3 - Bridge

Table 141 IPSHDSL3 - Bridge Table

Field Port VPI:VCI Incoming Octets Outgoing Octets Incoming frames Outgoing frames Incoming discard frames Incoming unicast frames Incoming multicast frames Description Port type. WAN port or ADSL port VPI, VCI values The number of octets that have been received by the bridge port from its segment The number of octets that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. The number of frames that have been received by the bridge port from its segment. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment The number of valid frames received from this bridge segment and are discarded by the forwarding process and the filtering process The number of unicast packets received from this bridge segment The number of multicast packets received from this bridge segment

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IPSHDSL3 Module

389

Table 141 IPSHDSL3 - Bridge Table

Field Incoming broadcast frames Outgoing unicast frames Outgoing multicast frames Outgoing broadcast frames Description The number of broadcast packets received from this bridge segment The number of unicast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment The number of multicast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment The number of broadcast packets that has been transmitted through this bridge segment

Select a port and click Reset Counter to reset the counts for a specific port. Click Reset All Counters to reset all counts for all ports. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest performance report.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

390

Chapter 8: Performance Management

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics provides loop test for IPADSLx modules in iAN8K B1000 system. Figure 302 shows the main window of the Diagnostics. Figure 302 Diagnostics Main Window

iAN8K B1000 supports the following diagnostics for IPADSLx modules:

F4/F5 Loopback DELT SELT (for IPADSL3A/6A modules only)

F4/F5 Loopback

ITU-T I.610 defines five hierarchical flows to support bi-directional flow for Operation and Maintenance (OAM) functions. Out of which, F4 and F5 are two upper flows for the ATM layer. Both flows are bidirectional, in-band management flows.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

392

Chapter 9: Diagnostics

The F4 is used for the VP while the F5 is used for VC. Both can be based upon a segment or an end-to-end basis. Typical applications for F4/F5 loopback are:

On-demand connectivity monitoring - A VP/VC end-to-end loopback can be initiated at the iAN8K B1000 side or CPE side to monitor connectivity Fault localization - A VP/VC segment loopback to diagnosis fault segment. Pre-service connectivity verification.

For F4 loopback test:

The ATM F4 loopback of end-to-end and segment loopback are supported per ATM PVP and SPVP. VCI value of 3 indicating a F4 segment loopback. VCI value of 4 indicating a F4 end-to-end loopback; Each cell is sent in one second apart regardless of the previous cell is received successfully or not. The loopback cell is considered lost if it is not returned within 5 seconds. It is counted toward lost loop-back cells. If receiving a F4 end-to-end or segment loopback cell, the line card at the loopback point (indicated by the loopback location ID in the OAM cell) sends back the cell via the original VP. It is required to set the loopback indication field from 1 to 0 prior looping the cell back to the originator to indicate that the loopback has occurred.

For F5 loopback test:

After the loopback test is initiated, line module sends ATM F5 end-to-end or segment loopback OAM cells via the VC as specified by the user. Each cell is sent in one second apart if reply is successfully received for the previous cell. Otherwise, IPxDSL module waits up to five-seconds before sending next cell.

Expand an IPADSLx module and click F4/F5 Loopback to open Figure 303. Select a port and click F5 Test or F4 Test to begin testing. Figure 304 prompts for F4 test parameters and Figure 305 prompts for F5 test parameters. .Note: The operational state of the port must be enabled to perform F4 or F5 loopback test on the port.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

F4/F5 Loopback

393

Figure 303 F4/F5 Loopback Window

Figure 304 F4/F5 Loopback - F4 Test Window

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

394

Chapter 9: Diagnostics

Figure 305 F4/F5 Loopback - F5 Test Window

Configures the parameters and click Start to begin the test. The test results are:

The number of transmitted F4/F5 loopback cells The number of received F4/F5 loopback cells

DELT

Dual Ended Loop Testing (DELT) is a new line-diagnose procedure introduced by ITU G.992.3 (ADSL2). DELT is typically used when the line quality is too poor to reach data mode and is activated to troubleshoot the problem. DELT enables the immediate measurement of line conditions at both ends of the line without dispatching maintenance technician to attach test equipment to the line. The result information helps to isolation the location and the source (crosstalk, radio frequency interference, bridge tap) of impairments. Note: For more information, please refer to the following document:

ITUT-T G.992.3 Asymmetric digital subscriber line transceivers 2 (ADSL2) (01/2005) section 8.15 Loop diagnostics mode procedures

Both CO and CPE must support DELT. In addition, DELT must be started from ONE side only while the other side initiates a normal startup. Expand an IPADSLx module and click DELT to open Figure 306. Select a port and click Start to begin testing. Note: The Administrative State of the port must be locked to perform DELT test.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

DELT

395

Figure 306 DELT Window

The Operational State of the port becomes In DELT Test when under testing. The port remains in-delt-test state until manually stopped. The DELT status displays in-progress, successful or failed. DELT test result can be retrieved only when DELT status become successful. Click Result to display the testing results. Samples of the test results are displayed in Figure 307, Figure 308, Figure 309 and Figure 310.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

396

Chapter 9: Diagnostics

Figure 307 DELT - Result - Hlin(f)

Figure 308 DELT - Result - Hlog(f)

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

DELT

397

Figure 309 DELT - Result - QLN(f)

Figure 310 DELT - Result - SNR(f)

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

398

Chapter 9: Diagnostics

Click Report to display the data for the test results as shown in Figure 311. Click Close to exit. Note: SNR margin is not supported in this release. The value is always 51.2 db in current release. It will be supported in a future release. Figure 311 DELT Window - Result - Report

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

SELT

399

SELT

SELT is used to characterize/test the loop during pre-service activation or during failure diagnose. SELT does not require CPE to be installed at the remote end. SELT operation does not impact the regular service on the adjacent ports. Single Ended Loop Testing (SELT) is not standardized in ITU. The requirements developed in this section are based on Conexant proprietary technology. Note: SELT test result can be viewed with Netman 4000 Client application only. Please install Netman 4000 Client application before runing the test. Expand an IPADSL3A/6A module and click SELT to open Figure 312. Select a port and click Start to begin testing. Note: The Administrative State of the port must be locked to perform SELT test. Figure 312 SELT Window

The Operational State of the port becomes In SELT Testing when under testing. When the test is complete, the Operational State of the port becomes Disabled again. Click Result to display the testing results shown in Figure 313. Refer to Table 142 for more information of the results.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

400

Chapter 9: Diagnostics

Figure 313 SELT - Test Result

Table 142 SELT - Test Result Field Description

Field Loop Information Loop Length This parameter determines the loop length in feet. SELT results are valid for loop length between approximately 600 feet to 9000 feet. If loop length is outside the range, SELT test returns Invalid. Termination This parameter determines if the loop is an open or short circuit.

Description

Open Short

Gauge

This parameter determines the wire gauge information.

0.4mm or 26 AWG 0.5mm or 24 AWG

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

SELT

401

Table 142 SELT - Test Result Field Description

Field Capacity Description Capacity margin in dB. User configurable. Default: 6dB. Upstream This parameter determines the upstream shannon capacity in Kbps. Shannon capacity is the theoretical maximum rate under ideal, unimpaired conditions, i.e., no noise, attenuation, etc. This parameter determines the downstream shannon capacity in Kbps. Shannon capacity is the theoretical maximum rate under ideal, unimpaired conditions, i.e., no noise, attenuation, etc. 512 values that indicate inband noise in dBm/Hz, covering both bands, from 0 to 2.2MHz.

Downstream

Plots Inband Noise

Magnitude: -150 - 0 dBm/Hz Frequency: 0 - 2.2 MHz

Termination Response

180 values that indicate signal termination response magnitude from 0 to 18 kft in 100 ft increments. The absolute maximum or peak corresponds to loop length or the location of the first open/short. Local maxima may correspond to other open/shorts or discontinuities in the loop.

Relative Magnitude: Varies according to the actual result Distance: 0 - 18000 feet

DMT Margin vs. Rate (UP)

150 values that indicate upstream SNR margin in dB/10 at a particular rate are provided, at 100 k increments, up to 15 Mbp.

Margin: -6 - 40 dB Rate: 0 - 2 Mbps

DMT Margin vs. Rate (DN)

150 values that indicate downstream SNR margin in dB/10 at a particular rate are provided, at 100 k increments, up to 15 Mbps.

Margin: -6 - 80 dB Rate: 0 - 30 Mbps

Click Table button to display the numerical data of the test results as shown in Figure 314. Click Close to exit the window.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

402

Chapter 9: Diagnostics

Figure 314 SELT - Test Result - Table

Note: Plot requires a program called WHIP. Start the program and run SELT test again. Refer to WHIP user manual for more information. The File menu provides the options to save the results or open an old DAT file previously saved. The default directory is C:\NMSClient\lib.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

SELT

403

Figure 315 SELT - Test Result - File - Directory

The View menu provides the options to enlarge the graphical view of the 4 graphical results in Figure 313. A sample is shown in Figure 316. Figure 316 SELT - Test Result - View - Inband Noise

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

404

Chapter 9: Diagnostics

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

10

FAULT MANAGEMENT

Fault Management provides the most current alarm information for the node to ensure network reliability. It allows users to perform monitoring and troubleshooting of IP DSLAM nodes from the desktops. IP DSLAM system alarms are detected and reported to Netman 4000 platform. This information can be used as a base to further determine a troubleshooting scheme. The node supports the following fault management configuration options:

Netman 4000 Alarm Report Alarm List

Note: Fault Management is applicable only for single shelf system. For stacking configuration, retrieve alarms from NetmanTM4000 platform. The alarms are listed in the bottom left panel according to the categories and severities. Clicking on each alarm numbers to view more details. Figure 317 Platform Level Alarms

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

406

Chapter 10: Fault Management

Netman 4000

When an alarm is detected and administrative state of affected resource is unlocked, the node reports the alarms as followed: 1 Update the operational state of the affected resource 2 Save the alarm in ICM3 3 Refreshes the PCU alarm lamp and PDP buzzer status 4 Sends alarm trap to Netman 4000 When an alarm is detected and administrative state of affected resource is locked, the node updates the operational state of the affected resource. Alarm reporting follows a hierarchy with alarm severity propagation, alarms at the port level affect the status of the board and alarms at the board level affect the status of the node. The system map is at the highest level in the alarm reporting hierarchy. The color of a node icon shows the alarms with the highest severity on the node. Alarm details are also displayed at the highest view bar.

Audible And Visual Alarm

IP DSLAM node supports audible and visual alarm display. Visual alarm displays are implemented in two levels. On PDP module, LED SYSALM is turned on when the current highest alarm severity has reached to a severity level customized by the user. On PCU module, the LED indicates the fan failure alarm.s Audible alarm is generated from PDP. It is triggered when a new alarm reaches the severity level customized by the user. The audio sound can be turned off temporarily (until the next alarm triggers it) with the AUDIO button on the PDP. Visual alarm indications, however, cannot be temporarily altered. User can define the alarm visual/audible display behavior from Netman 4000 platform.

Alarm Presentation

Alarms are represented in an alarm tree as shown in Figure 318. The alarm tree is based on a parent-child relationship. The tree starts with a node. Below the node branch are shelf, equipment and external. Below shelf branch are boards, ports and channels. An IP DSLAM node reports alarms and states change notifications to the management system on-demand and autonomously.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Alarm Report

407

Figure 318 Alarm Tree

Table 143 describes entities and their relationship with other entities. An entity can be a placeholder that doesn't have any alarms of its own. However it will reflect the sub-tree level severity e.g. shelf entity reflects the highest severity for all the child entities below the shelf branch. Table 143 Node Alarm Tree Entity
Entity Node Shelf Slot Board name Description The top-level entity that represents an IP DSLAM access node. All the system alarms shall be reported on this entity. This entity represents a shelf of the IP DSLAM access node. It is a placeholder entity. It represents a slot in a particular shelf. If a board is inserted in the slot, all the alarms related to the board are reported on this entity. Instance Naming Node name 1 to 6 1 to 16, A, B, P Board type Parent Entity None IP DSLAM node Shelf Slot Slot

<Port Type> Port This entity represents a physical port on a particular board. This is a 1 to 24 base class for specific port entities. Alarms related to a specific port are reported on the respective specific port entity Channel It represents a logical port that is a part of physical ports, for example in the IPADSL board, an ADSL port is the physical port, while the fast-channel that is carried by this port is the channel. This entity represents an ATM layer Number

Slot

ATM Interface

Interface Id (channel index or the interface number) None None None None

Channel

Equipment Clock PDP Fuse External

This entity is a placeholder for the system components of the IP DSLAM access node e.g. fuse, etc. This entity is a placeholder for clock related alarms It represents the PDP fuses. This entity is used to report all the alarms that are detected on external devices like PCU.

IP DSLAM Node Equipment Equipment IP DSLAM Node

Alarm Report

IP DSLAM supports the following configuration for alarm reporting:

Alarm Report
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

408

Chapter 10: Fault Management

Alarm Summary Filter Setup

Alarm Report

To view the alarm tree, click on Alarm tab in the bottom of device manager window. The alarm window is promoted as shown in Figure 319. Figure 319 Fault Management Main Window

Select an entry from the tree view to display its alarm report. Figure 320 displays the node alarm report, Figure 321 displays the equipment alarm report and Figure 322 displays the port alarm report.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Alarm Report

409

Figure 320 Node Alarm

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

410

Chapter 10: Fault Management

Figure 321 Equipment Alarm

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Alarm Report

411

Figure 322 Port Alarm

For more detail information of the alarm report, please refer to Table 144, Table 145, Table 146 and Table 147. Table 144 Alarm Report - Subtree
Field Entity Type Entity Instance Subtree severity Description Shows the Entity (board, port etc.) for described alarms The location in terms of Shelf-Slot-Port. The highest severity of the sub-tree. Due to the parent child nature of the relationship of an entity with all its sub entities, the parent reflects the highest severity among itself and its children

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

412

Chapter 10: Fault Management

Table 145 Alarm Report - Alarm Class

Category Communication Alarm Quality Of Service Alarm Equipment Alarm Processing Error Alarm Environmental Alarm Description Associated with the procedures and/or processes required to convey information from one point to another Associated with a degradation in the quality of a service Associated with an equipment fault Associated with a software or processing fault Associated with a condition relating to an enclosure in which the equipment resides

Table 146 Alarm Report - Alarm Severity

Category Critical Major Minor Warning Color Red Orange Yellow Blue Description Indicates that a service affect condition has occurred and an immediate corrective action is required. Indicates that a service affect condition has developed and an urgent corrective action is required. Indicates the existence of a non-service affect fault condition and that corrective action shall be taken in order to prevent more serious fault (for example, service affecting). Indicates the detection of a potential or impending service affecting fault, before any significant effects have been felt. Action shall be taken to further diagnose if required and correct the problem in order to prevent it leading to a more serious service affecting fault.

Table 147 Alarm Report - Alarm List Entity

Category Probable Cause Specific Problems Severity Time Stamp Alarm Class Additional Text Description This parameter defines further qualification as to the probable cause of the alarm. This parameter identifies further refinements to the Probable cause of the alarm. This parameter defines severity levels as listed in Table 146. This parameter contains the time the event occurs. This parameter indicates the type of alarm as listed in Table 145. This parameter allows a free form text description to be reported. Optional.

Click Alarm Summary to display all alarms for the entire system. Refer to Alarm Summary section for more information. Click Filter Setup to configure alarm filter for the modules. Refer to Filter Setup section for more information. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest alarm information. Alarm Summary The alarm summary window displays all the alarms in the node. Select an entity from the tree view and click Alarm Summary to display Figure 323. For more information of parameters, please refer to Table 144, Table 145, Table 146 and Table 147. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest alarm information. Click Close button to exit the window.
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Alarm Report

413

Figure 323 Alarm Summary Window

Filter Setup

Filters allow temporary isolation of alarms from the entire alarm list, which helps the troubleshooting. Filtering can be configured based on the alarm category, alarm severity and probable cause. Filters are not propagated across the alarm tree hierarchy. Select an entity from the tree view and click Filter Setup to open Figure 324. For more information of the parameters, please refer to Table 144, Table 145, Table 146 and Table 147. Select a board in Figure 324 and configure the filters. Click Apply to enable the new filter configuration. Click Retrieve to obtain the latest filter information. Click Close to exit the window.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

414

Chapter 10: Fault Management

Figure 324 Alarm Filter Window

Note: The probable causes listed in Figure 324 varies according to the module selected.

Alarm List

The following alarms are included in the IP DSLAM alarm reporting scheme.

Node Alarm External Alarm\ ICM3 Alarm IP-ADSLx Alarm IP-SHDSL3 Alarm iFXS1 Alarm

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Alarm List

415

Node Alarm Table 148 Node Alarm List

Event Type Processing Error Alarm Probable Cause Software Download Failure Specific Problems Download Time Out; Additional Info = "Failure in Slot #<slot number>" Fuse Down - Fuse #<fuse number> Fan failure - fan <x>; Fan failure - rack fan External Clock Down Managed Object Severity Node Warning Occurrence Cause SW download timeout Clear Condition SW download success Fuse recovered Fan is up External clock signal is received Module is plugged in The wrong board unplugged Remedy Remove redundant files from flash. Reset line card. Replace Fuse Replace the bad fan unit Check external clock status Check if the module is plugged in properly Unplug the wrong board

Environmental Fuse Failure Alarm Environmental Fan Failure Alarm Equipment Alarm Equipment Alarm Equipment Alarm Timing Problem

Node Node Clock

Minor Major Major

Fuse burned Fan failure External clock down Module removed from a slot Inserted board type mismatch

Null Module Removed from slot x Module type mismatch Specify the slot ID, the physical module type and virtual module type

Node

Critical

Node

Major

Processing Alarm

Black List Null Address Match

Node

Warning

MAC address matches provisioned black list ICM switched to redundant unit Standby ICM is running a higher version image

When black N/A list feature is disabled N/A Check ICM board status Install compatible software version

Equipment Alarm Equipment Alarm

ICM Switchover

Null

Node

Critical

Standby ICM3 Null is running a higher version image Standby ICM3 Null is running a lower version image Feature key can not be found External module work status changed

Node

Warning

Compatible software version is running

Equipment Alarm

Node

Major

Standby ICM is Compatible running a lower software version image version is running Region setting When the could not be region is determined determined A configured external module is not accessible The external module becomes accessible

Install compatible software version

Processing error alarm Processing error alarm

Region setting could Node not be determined Board

Critical

Install correct region key file Check external module status. Check connection to the external module. Check configuration of the external module.

Minor

The module type mismatch alarm is raised and the inserted module becomes non-operational, if the physical module inserted does not match the virtual module assigned in the slot. The alarm is cleared after virtual module is
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

416

Chapter 10: Fault Management

de-assigned (i.e., module shall become manageable after the virtual module is de-assigned) or after the physical module is removed. External Alarm Table 149 External Alarm List
Event Type Probable Cause Specific Problems Per user configuration Managed Object Per user configuration Severity Per user configuration Occurrence Clear Cause Condition Per user configured alarm Per user configured alarm Remedy Per user configured alarm

Equipment Alarm External Interface Device Problem

ICM3 Alarm Table 150 ICM3 Alarm List

Event Type Communication Alarm Specific Problems Managed Object NULL Internal Ethernet interface (displayed as internal x/y, x=1..16 (chassis dependent), y=1,2) Internal Trunk interface (displayed as internal x, x=1..16, chassis dependent) Severity Major Occurrence Cause Clear Condition Internal link Internal link up. partially down Internal link Internal link up. down Remedy Check backplane connection. Reset the module. Check backplane connection. Reset the module. Check external Ethernet connection. Check configurations such as speed. Check link connectivity

Communication Alarm

NULL

Critical

Communication Alarm

NULL

External Ethernet interface, Critical (displayed as FE x where x = 1..4; GE y where y=1..4; or 10G 1) External Ethernet interface Major

External Link down

External Ethernet interface connection is established.

Communication Alarm Communication Alarm

NULL

External External link up. Link in trunk down External trunk down

NULL

External Trunk interface

Critical

External trunk up. Check link connectivity

IP-ADSLx Alarm Table 151 IP-ADSLx Alarm List

Event Type Communication Alarm Communication Alarm Communication Alarm Communication Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Probable Cause Initialization failure Loss of signal Loss of link ATU-R capability mismatch 1 ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed

Specific Problems Null Null No link with ATU-R ATU-C, ATU-R profile setting mismatch 15 Min. LOF, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. LOS, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. LOL, Threshold value, Arm time

Managed Object ADSL port ADSL Port ADSL Port ADSL Port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port

Perceived Severity Critical Critical Major Major Minor Minor Minor

July 2006

Alarm List

417

Table 151 IP-ADSLx Alarm List

Event Type QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QoS Alarm QOS Alarm QOS Alarm QOS Alarm QOS Alarm QOS Alarm QOS Alarm QOS Alarm QOS Alarm Communication Alarm Probable Cause ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-C Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed ATU-R Threshold crossed WAN port threshold Crossed WAN port threshold Crossed WAN port threshold Crossed WAN port threshold Crossed WAN port threshold Crossed WAN port threshold Crossed WAN port threshold Crossed WAN port threshold Crossed Excessive CRC errors for consecutive 10 seconds Specific Problems 15 Min. ES, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. SES, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. UAS, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. LOF, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. LOS, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. LOL, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. ES, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. SES, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. UAS, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. LOF, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. LOS, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. LPR, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. ES, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. SES, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. UAS, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. LOF, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. LOS, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. LPR, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. ES, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. SES, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. UAS, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. Alignment Error, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. Over sized Frame, Threshold value, Arm time 15 Min. Collision, Threshold value, Arm time Managed Object ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port ADSL port WAN port Perceived Severity Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Major

15 Min. CRC Error, Threshold value, Arm time WAN port WAN port WAN port

24 Hr. Alignment Error, Threshold value, Arm WAN port time 24 Hr. CRC Error, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. Over sized Frame, Threshold value, Arm time 24 Hr. Collision, Threshold value, Arm time Automatic Full Retrain engaged WAN port WAN port WAN port DSL Port

Note: The capability mismatch alarm is only supported with GSV compatible ATU-R device. Such device will respond to ATU-C polling and report its current capability setting. When ADSL link goes down, ATU-C polls the ATU-R for capability value. If returned capability mis-matches the ATU-C's own capability setting, an alarm is raised. If no capability value is returned (ATU-R does not support this feature) or the returned capability matches ATU-C capability, no alarm would be raised. The alarm is cleared when ADSL link comes up or when
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

418

Chapter 10: Fault Management

returned ATU-R capability matches ATU-C capability. Currently capabilities are grouped as following:

T1.413 G.dmt Annex A FDM G.dmt Annex A EC G.dmt Annex B FDM G.dmt Annex B EC G.dmt Annex C FDM G.dmt Annex C EC G.lite Annex A FDM G.lite Annex C EC G.lite Annex FDM G.span Annex A FDM G.span Annex A EC G.span+ EC G.span+ FDM

Depending on the profile, ATU-C will support one or more capabilities. If ATU-R supports any one of the capabilities that is supported by ATU-C, and then a match is considered. IP-SHDSL3 Alarm Table 152 IP-SHDSL3 Alarm List
Event Type Communication Alarm Probable Cause Loss of signal Specific Problems NULL Managed Object SHDSL port Perceived Severity Critical

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Alarm List

419

iFXS1 Alarm Table 153 Alarm List of iFXS1 Based on SIP

Alarm Type Communication Alarm Specific Problems Managed Object Failure to Module resolve AS IP address Cannot Module reach AS Module Loss of connectio n to AS User registrati on failed Port Severity Major Occurrence Cause Clear Condition DNS problem As IP address resolved Remedy Check DNS

Communication Alarm Communication Alarm

Major Critical

Network problem Server down or network problem Display error code from AS

Network problem solved Server up or network problem resolved User can register

Check network Check AS and network

Communication Alarm

Minor

Resolve misconfiguration

Table 154 Alarm List of RTP Related

Alarm Type QoS Alarm Specific Problems Managed Object Cumulati Module ve number of packets lost threshold exceeded Interarriv Module al jitter exceeded Severity Minor Occurrence Cause Clear Condition Remedy

Accumulate When the next 15 Resolve network troubles min interval d packet loss in a 15 begins min interval exceeds threshold setting Interarrival When the next 15 Resolve network jitter in a 15 min interval troubles min interval begins exceeds threshold setting

QoS Alarm

Minor

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

420

Chapter 10: Fault Management

Table 154 Alarm List of RTP Related

Alarm Type QoS Alarm Specific Problems Managed Object Jitter buffer overflow Module Severity Minor Occurrence Cause Clear Condition Jitter buffer overflow in a 15 min interval exceeds threshold setting Jitter buffer underflow in a 15 min interval exceeds threshold setting Average delay in a 15 min interval exceeds threshold setting Remedy

When the next 15 Resolve network min interval troubles begins

QoS Alarm

Jitter Module buffer underflow

Minor

When the next 15 Resolve network min interval troubles begins

QoS Alarm

Excessiv Module e delay in the network

Minor

When the next 15 Resolve network min interval troubles begins

Table 155 Alarm List of Uplink FE Interface

Manag ed Object Severity Port Port Warning Critical

Alarm Type Communication Alarm Communication Alarm

Probable Cause Loss of signal at Ethernet interface Loss of signal at Ethernet interface

Specific Problems FE interface loss of signal before MG interface activates FE interface loss of signal after MG interface activates

Event List for iFXS1 Module Table 156 Event List Based on SIP
Event Type MG interface provisioning Event Information MG interface administrative on/off Register to the AS Logout from the AS AS switchover Description MG interface locked MG interface unlocked Node Node Node switch to other AS

Register to AS Logout from AS AS protection switching

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Alarm List

421

Table 157 Basic Event List

Event Type MG starts up Event Information MG starts up Description iFXS1 module starts up

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

422

Chapter 10: Fault Management

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

11

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

System Administration encompasses updating firmware and User Management.

Node File Management Software Upgrade

ICM3 Module IPxDSL Modules ISM Module ASM Module

File Transfer

Download Upload Delete

ICM3 Module Backup ICM3 Module Replacement Remote Access

Node File Management

Use the procedures in this section to delete, upload, and download node files. The Netman 4000 File Transfer function can be used over the entire IP network. The ICM3 has a flash memory of 16Mb, please refer to Table 158 for the description and approximate size of node files. Please verify that the ICM3 has enough space before loading any files. Please see the remarks section in the table below for any Node file management. The files as shown in Table 158 below are line card image files and should be downloaded into the system only if the respective line card is present. These files should be loaded sequentially and not at the same time even though the TFTP server may support multiple file transfers. Please backup the existing icm_upgrade.gz and icm2_config.gz.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

424

Chapter 11: System Administration

Table 158 Node File Description

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Module Name ICM3 ICM3 ICM3 ICM3 ICM3h IPADSL3A IPADSL3A IPADSL3B IPADSL3B IPADSL6A IPADSL6A IPADSL6B IPADSL6B IPSHDSL3 IPSHDSL3 PCU ISM ASM File Name Icm_upgrade.gz icm2_config.gz loader_rev_2_0.gz jffs2.tar.gz icm3hB1K_loader_rev_0_8.gz ipadsl3a.img dslfw3a.img ipadsl3b.img dslfw3b.img ipadsl6a.img dslfw6a.img ipadsl6b.img dslfw6b.img ipshdsl3.img shdslfw3.img pcu.bin system.fw asm_3.0.0.04_full.bin Approximate Size in bytes 5016851 bytes Size varies based on configuration 109551 bytes 15053867 bytes 116445 bytes 2008276 bytes 170548 bytes 2014208 bytes 170856 bytes 2009136 bytes 170548 bytes 2015132 bytes 170856 bytes 1994732 bytes 97308 bytes 23618 bytes 8885768 bytes 5,302,214 bytes

Software Upgrade
ICM3 Module This section provides information for upgrading ICM3 software from Release 3.x to a higher version of Release 3.1.x. Refer contact an UTStarcom IPS representative for detailed instruction of upgrading from Release 2.x to Release 3.1.x or upgrading with shelf stacking system. Note: Prior to switch to an ICM3 module or replace the old ICM3 module with a new ICM3 module, confirm the following:

The new ICM3 module contains the same configuration as the old ICM3 module. Or Insert the new ICM3 module without any configuration and download a copy of the previously saved configuration of the old ICM3 module.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Software Upgrade

425

Upgrade with A Redundant ICM3 Module Figure 325 is a pictorial depiction of the software upgrade process when the redundant ICM is present.

Part 1: before software upgrade and module switchover. Part 2: uploading software to the flash memory of both ICM3 modules. Part 3: upgrading the standby ICM3 module, ICM3-B. Part 4: ICM3 module switchover and upgrading the ICM3-A module.

Figure 325 Software Upgrade

(1)
Active ICM3-A RAM Standby ICM3-B RAM Active ICM3-A RAM

(2)
Standby ICM3-B RAM

OLD

OLD

OLD

OLD

Flash

Flash OLD

Flash NEW

Flash NEW

OLD

(3)
Active ICM3-A RAM Standby ICM3-B RAM Standby ICM3-A RAM

(4)
Active ICM3-B RAM

OLD

NEW

NEW

NEW

Flash NEW

Flash NEW

Flash NEW

Flash NEW

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

426

Chapter 11: System Administration

When standby ICM3 module is presented, follow the procedures below for upgrading from Release 3.1.x to a higher version of Release 3.1.x: 1 Confirm the standby ICM3 module has sufficient space (ICM3-B). a Use the following CLI command to check the flash memory for the ICM3 module: ICM3 Board 172.16.4.155 login: admin Password: You are now in the Privileged Mode AN2000_IB#show memory file /tmp/tftp/icm2_config.gz /tftpboot/dslfw3a.img /tftpboot/dslfw3b.img /tftpboot/ipadsl3a.img /tftpboot/ipadsl3b.img /tftpboot/pcu.bin /tftpboot/system.key Filesystem file-size 76206 170548 170856 2004588 2010484 8507 396

1k-blocks Used Available Use% Mounted on 31744 24468 7276 77% /

/dev/mtdblock/1

b Remove files from all ICM3 modules if it contains unnecessary files. From the CLI global configuration mode, use one of the following command to erase files from the ICM3 modules: AN2000_IB#erase config all AN2000_IB#erase memory <file name> AN2000_IB#erase memory all

Note: The erase memory <file name> command removes the specified file from the standby ICM3 module and/or the active ICM3 module. If the file exists only on the standby module, the system may return an error message of The file is not found... . This occurs due to the file does not exist on the active ICM3 module. However the specified file is removed from the standby ICM3 module. 2 Start downloading new image to active ICM3 Flash memory.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Software Upgrade

427

3 Active ICM3 (ICM3-A) Flash memory is downloaded with new image and standby ICM3 (ICM3-B) Flash memory is synchronized with new image. 4 Reset the standby ICM3 (ICM3-B). ICM3 is rebooted with new image running. 5 Reset the active ICM3 (ICM3-A). The ICM3-B is switched over to active and runs new image. The ICM3-A becomes standby and is rebooted with new image running. Note: If ICM3 module does not recognize the line modules correctly after system reboot, softreset all the line modules in slot 1 to 16. Do not reset ICM3 module. To guarantee accurate module recognition, ICM3 must become fully functional before all line modules becoming functional. Refer to Chapter 3 for more information of resetting line module in Device manager. IPxDSL Modules Follow the procedures in this section to upgrade line modules software: 1 Confirm the ICM3 module has sufficient space. a Use the following CLI command to check the flash memory for the ICM3 module: ICM3 Board 172.16.4.155 login: admin Password: You are now in the Privileged Mode AN2000_IB#show memory file /tmp/tftp/icm2_config.gz /tftpboot/dslfw3a.img /tftpboot/dslfw3b.img /tftpboot/ipadsl3a.img /tftpboot/ipadsl3b.img /tftpboot/pcu.bin /tftpboot/system.key Filesystem file-size 76206 170548 170856 2004588 2010484 8507 396

1k-blocks Used Available Use% Mounted on 31744 24468 7276 77% /

/dev/mtdblock/1

b Remove files from the ICM3 module if it contains unnecessary files. From the CLI global configuration mode, use one of the following command to erase files from the ICM3 modules: AN2000_IB#erase config all AN2000_IB#erase memory <file name> AN2000_IB#erase memory all
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

428

Chapter 11: System Administration

Note: The erase memory command removes the specified file from the active ICM3 module and/or the standby ICM3 module. If the file exists only on the standby module, the system may return an error message of The file is not found... . This occurs due to the file does not exist on the active ICM3 module. However the specified file is removed from the standby ICM3 module. 2 Download a single line card image on the ICM3 and reset the module in which the relevant line card is present. This will initiate a forced download of the image. Refer to Chapter 3 - Provisioning - Node - Reset for more information on softreset and hardreset. 3 Delete the line card image from the ICM3 module. 4 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 till all the line card images are downloaded to the line cards via ICM3. Note: Do not retain line card images file on ICM3 modules. ISM Module Refer to ISM manual for more information:

iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 IP Service Module (ISM) Operations Manual UTSI-NJTC-20050697

ASM Module

Refer to ASM manual for more information:

iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 IP ATM Service Module (ASM) Operations Manual UTSI-NJTC-20050699

File Transfer

Netman 4000 supports TFTP option to allowing files management of:

Download - File transfer from client PC to node (ICM3) Upload - File transfer from node (ICM3) to client PC Delete - Node file deletion

This procedure is used to manage node files. The Netman 4000 File transfer function can be used over the entire IP network. In the Netman 4000 main system map, select TFTP from the Tools menu as shown in Figure 326. Select the Client Mode radio button in Figure 327.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

File Transfer

429

Figure 326 Tools - TFTP

Figure 327 Tools - TFTP - Client Mode

The TFTP window is prompted as shown in Figure 328. Expand the window with the arrows to view the directories.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

430

Chapter 11: System Administration

Figure 328 Tools - TFTP Window

In Figure 329, the left side displays the directories for the local station and the right side displays the node directories.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

File Transfer

431

Figure 329 Tools - TFTP Window - Expanded

Download Note: In the case of a file not being successfully downloaded, the truncated file may remain in the flash. This file needs to be removed manually with the procedures listed in the Delete section. In the event of the flash being inaccessible, please reboot the system and retry the operation. Follow the procedures below to transfer files from any local station to the node: 1 Locate the file to be transferred from the local station. 2 Select a directory from the node. 3 Click the Download button to start downloading files. 4 Users can verify the process by comparing the file size. Click Refresh and compare the file size on the local and remote systems. If the size is the same, the transfer was successful. If the file does not show up on the remote system directory structure, download failed. Repeat the file transfer procedures.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

432

Chapter 11: System Administration

5 If the ICM3 flash is full or there isn't enough space for the files to be downloaded, Netman 4000 prompts an error message. Delete unused files on ICM3. Upload Follow the procedures below to transfer files from the node to any local station: 1 Select a file from the node. 2 Locate the directory on the local station to place the node files. 3 Click the Upload button to start uploading files. 4 Users can verify the process by comparing the file size. Click Refresh and compare the file size on the local and remote systems. If the size is the same, the transfer was successful. If the file does not show up on the local system directory structure, upload failed. Repeat the file transfer procedures. Delete Follow the procedures below to permanently delete files from the node: WARNING: Avoid using this deletion command. Removal of certain files will cause system malfunctions. Please consult with Customer Service before deleting any system files. 1 Select a file from the node. 2 Click the Delete button to remove the selected files. Note: Files in the running directory cannot be deleted.

ICM3 Module Backup

Netman 4000 also provides an option to backup the entire node. In the Netman 4000 main system map, right click a node and select Backup Node to start backing up all the files in the node.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

ICM3 Module Replacement

433

Figure 330 Backup Node

ICM3 Module Replacement

The new ICM3 from the factory must not be directly plugged in a live system, with a faulty ICM3. Uploading the new ICM3 with the existing backed up database must be done in a different iAN8K B1000 system than in the live system where the bad ICM3 resides. This is due to the new ICM3 initially has a different database and if inserted into a live system, it would cause all the IPxDSL modules to reset and interrupt user traffic. Note: When replacing/switching the ICM3 module, the new ICM3 module must contain the same configuration as the original ICM3 modules or contain no configuration in order to prevent configuration conflict. Once the new ICM3 contains the identical IP and module database then replace the bad ICM3 without interrupting user traffic. The iAN8K B1000 system has been designed such that the IPxDSL modules can continue to provide basic user service without the ICM3 for a brief period during which the faulty ICM3 is being replaced. WARNING: There should not be any module resets when there is no ICM3 in the system. Doing so the module will be rendered out of service. If the system is reset, the module will not come up again without the ICM3. The ICM3 module from the factory comes with an initial factory configuration and a default IP address (10.20.30.1). To upload the configuration and

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

434

Chapter 11: System Administration

provisioning data stored in a client PC, first the IP address must be changed, so that communication with the ICM3 can be setup. This is done by accessing the ICM3 module through its maintenance port (Serial Port on its faceplate) using windows standard hyper-terminal software. Note: When replacing/switching the ICM3 module, the new ICM3 module must contain the same configuration as the original ICM3 modules or contain no configuration in order to prevent configuration conflict. Follow the steps below to replace an ICM3 module: 1 Connect a Serial cable between the Console Port of ICM3 and a COM port of Management Terminal. 2 Run HyperTerminal application on the Management terminal. Set the COM port Communication Port parameters as 9600, N, 8, 1. 3 Press the Enter key on the key board and follow the command below: ICM3 board 172.16.4.155 login: admin Password: You are now in the Privileged Mode AN2000_IB# 4 Use this command to setup the node IP address. The Netmask parameter is optional and if not specified the system takes the default Netmask as 255.255.255.0. ip management address <A.B.C.D> netmask <A.B.C.D> 5 Use this command to setup Netman server address and primary/secondary trap destinations. snmp netman-destination <A.B.C.D> <primary/secondary>

Note: Refer to iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 CLI User Manual for more information of gateway ip, router configuration, etc. 6 For B820 chassis, connect PCU NMS IN Port to the LAN using a CAT5 ethernet cable. For B1000 chassis, use NMS IN Port on ICM3 adapter module. 7 Connect CLI PC to LAN using a CAT5 ethernet cable. 8 Start communication with the node. You are now ready to carry out the Provisioning and Management.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Remote Access

435

Remote Access

iAN8K B1000 supports a direct CLI interface and Telnet access of the node for maintenance purpose. Please refer to the following manuals for more information:

iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 Command Line Interface (CLI) User Manual UTSI-NJTC-20050624 iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 IP Service Module (ISM) Command Line Interface (CLI) User Manual UTSI-NJTC-20050698 iAN8K B1000 Release 3.1 ATM Service Module (ASM) Command Line Interface (CLI) User Manual UTSI-NJTC-20050700

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

436

Chapter 11: System Administration

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

This document provides the following ACL application examples for development and field engineers for ACL deployment:

PPPoE Access Deny Configuration Example IP Address Conflict Deny Specific Subscriber To Access FTP Prohibit A Specific Subscriber To Access ABC IM Service

PPPoE Access Deny Configuration Example

Scenario This is an example of using ACL to deny PPPoE access. Through ACL, the user can prohibit subscriber access through PPPoE and at the same time allow access through other methods (i.e. dedicated line, etc.). PPPoE relies on two widely accepted standards: PPP and Ethernet. PPPoE is a specification for connecting users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium, such as a single DSL line, wireless device or cable modem. For Ethernet, all users over the Ethernet share a common connection. So the Ethernet principle of multiple users in a LAN combines with the PPP principle of serial connections. In other words PPPoE is a relay protocol between Ethernet and dialup. It inherits the advantage of the speed of the Ethernet, the simplicity of PPP dialup, with subscriber authentication, IP distribution, etc. In the actual implementation, PPPoE emulates Ethernet's mechanism. It connects the 10 BaseT port of ADSL Modem to the internal Ethernet. ADSL Modem uses RFC1483 bridging to encapsulate PPP packets by LLC/SNAP. By connecting the 2 PVCs between ADSL Modem and network side broadband access server, dynamic PPP access is accomplished. PPPoE access uses 1 PVC between network side and ADSL Modem to accomplish multiple access on Ethernet. There are 2 phases for establishing point-to-point protocol on one Ethernet: Discovery phase and Session phase. In Discovery phase, subscriber PC broadcasts and searches for all possible access multiplexers and it then obtains the Ethernet address. Then it selects the access concentrator that needs to be connected for establishing PPP dialog. In Session phase, subscriber and access concentrator start PPP dialog according to PPP dialog connecting
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

Analysis

438

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

parameters agreed to in the Discovery phase. Correspondingly, Ethernet point-to-point protocol frame has 2 types of formats: In Discovery phase, Ethernet frame type field is 0x8863; In Session phase, Ethernet frame type field is 0x8864. IEEE certifies both formats. When creating a configuration, the user may consider denying a specific type of Ethernet frame (types 0x8863). By doing this, PPPoE access deny is accomplished from the beginning (Discovery phase). Solution 1 From Profile menu, select Access List Profiles shown in Figure 331 to open the access list profile summary shown in Figure 332. Figure 331 Profile Menu - Access List Profiles

Figure 332 Access List Profile Summary Window

2 Click Add in Figure 332 to create profiles.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

PPPoE Access Deny Configuration Example

439

3 Add 2 profiles. Configure first profile to Deny from Ethernet Type of 0x8863 to Any as shown in Figure 333. Figure 333 PPPoE Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Deny

4 Configure second profile to Permit from Any to Any as shown in Figure 334.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

440

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 334 PPPoE Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Permit

5 The new profiles are shown in Figure 335. Figure 335 PPPoE Access Deny - 2 Profiles Added

6 Select the Access List of the IPxDSL module to open Figure 336.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

PPPoE Access Deny Configuration Example

441

Figure 336 PPPoE Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Access List

7 Select the WAN port and click Edit. Apply both profiles to Outbound of WAN port as shown in Figure 337.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

442

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 337 PPPoE Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Outbound

8 The result is shown in Figure 338. Access control configuration for PPPoE access denial is complete.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IP Address Conflict

443

Figure 338 PPPoE Access Deny - Complete

Conclusion

After applying the above configuration to iAN8K B1000, subscriber's PPPoE will then be prohibited. The above configuration denies PPPoE for all subscribers (24 lines) on IPxDSL card. Similarly, this scheme can also be used to deny PPPoE for some specific subscribers of a specific ADSL board.

IP Address Conflict
Scenario For subscriber's PC dialing up through PPPoE, the connectivity is:

PC connects UT300-R modem UT300-R modem connects to iAN8K B1000 iAN8K B1000 modem connects to B-RAS

After subscriber PC has dialed up, an error message is displayed (192.168.1.3 and system hardware address conflict). Analysis With UT-300R modem default setting, modem starts the internal DHCP Server with address pool in 192.168.1.m subnet. After subscriber's PC is connected to modem, the network card obtains an IP address from 192.168.1.n pool. When 2
iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

444

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

subscribers obtain the same IP address, the address conflict error message occurs. Shutting down the DHCP service gateway of the modem can solve this problem easily, but modifying modem configuration becomes complicated when a lot of them are deployed. In such scenario, modifying ACL of iAN8K B1000 can solve this problem. Solution 1 From Profile menu, select Access List Profiles shown in Figure 339 to open the access list profile summary shown in Figure 340. Figure 339 Profile Menu - Access List Profiles

Figure 340 Access List Profile Summary Window

2 Click Add in Figure 340 to create profiles.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IP Address Conflict

445

3 Add 2 profiles. Configure first profile to Permit from Any to Any as shown in Figure 341. Figure 341 IP Address Conflict - Add Access List Profile - Permit

4 Configure second profile to Deny from ARP-send-IP to Any as shown in Figure 342. Configure the ARP sent IP address to the modem DHCP address pool (usually is 192.168.1.0).

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

446

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 342 IP Address Conflict - Add Access List Profile - Deny

5 The new profiles are shown in Figure 343. Figure 343 IP Address Conflict - 2 Profiles Added

6 Select the Access List of the IPxDSL module to open Figure 344.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

IP Address Conflict

447

Figure 344 IP Address Conflict - IPxDSL Module - Access List

7 Select the WAN port and click Edit. Apply both profiles to Outbound of WAN port as shown in Figure 345.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

448

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 345 IP Address Conflict - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Outbound

8 The result is shown in Figure 346. Access control configuration for IP address conflict is complete.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Deny Specific Subscriber To Access FTP

449

Figure 346 IP Address Conflict - Complete

Conclusion

After configuring iAN8K B1000 with above settings, iAN8K B1000 will not forward the ARP messages received from subscriber PC. This way other PC will not have any information of the IP address. Even when the IP addresses of subscribers duplicate, there will be no IP conflict error message.

Deny Specific Subscriber To Access FTP

Scenario Administrator of network management center wants to deny a specific subscriber from using FTP. FTP uses TCP port 21. Therefore the solution is to block this port number through ACL of iAN8K B1000.

Analysis

Solution 1 From Profile menu, select Access List Profiles shown in Figure 347 to open the access list profile summary shown in Figure 348.
July 2006 iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

450

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 347 Profile Menu - Access List Profiles

Figure 348 Access List Profile Summary Window

2 Click Add in Figure 348 to create profiles. 3 Add 2 profiles. Configure first profile to Deny from Any to TCP Port as shown in Figure 349. Configure the port number to 21.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Deny Specific Subscriber To Access FTP

451

Figure 349 FTP Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Deny

4 Configure second profile to Permit from Any to Any as shown in Figure 350.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

452

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 350 FTP Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Permit

5 The new profiles are shown in Figure 351. Figure 351 FTP Access Deny - 2 Profiles Added

6 Select the Access List of the IPxDSL module to open Figure 352.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Deny Specific Subscriber To Access FTP

453

Figure 352 FTP Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Access List

7 Select the WAN port and click Edit. Apply both profiles to Inbound and Outbound of WAN port as shown in Figure 353 and Figure 354

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

454

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 353 FTP Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Inbound

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Deny Specific Subscriber To Access FTP

455

Figure 354 FTP Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Outbound

8 The result is shown in Figure 355. Access control configuration for PPPoE access denial is complete.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

456

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 355 FTP Access Deny - Complete

Conclusion

This scheme prohibits a specific subscriber to use FTP. Network management administrator can also apply similar schemes to prohibit subscriber to use other applications such as telnet.

Prohibit A Specific Subscriber To Access ABC IM Service

Scenario Network Administrator wants to prohibit subscriber from using ABC IM service for online chat. Must obtain the exact domain name and IP address of the server that is frequently used by ABC IM Software. For example:

Analysis

sz.tencent.com 61. 144. 238. 145 sz2.tencent.com 61. 144. 238. 146 sz3.tencent.com 202. 104. 129. 25

Use ACL to block the IP address of ABC IM server.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual July 2006

Prohibit A Specific Subscriber To Access ABC IM Service

457

Solution 1 From Profile menu, select Access List Profiles shown in Figure 356 to open the access list profile summary shown in Figure 357. Figure 356 Profile Menu - Access List Profiles

Figure 357 Access List Profile Summary Window

2 Click Add in Figure 357 to create profiles. 3 Add 3 profiles. Configure first profile to Deny from Any to IP Address as shown in Figure 358. Click the Range radio button and configure the starting and ending IP addresses.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

458

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 358 ABC IM Service Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Deny IP Address Range

4 Configure second profile to Deny from Any to IP Address as shown in Figure 359. Configure a specific IP address and its netmask.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Prohibit A Specific Subscriber To Access ABC IM Service

459

Figure 359 ABC IM Service Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Deny Specific IP Address

5 Configure third profile to Permit from Any to Any as shown in Figure 360.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

460

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 360 ABC IM Service Access Deny - Add Access List Profile - Permit

6 The new profiles are shown in Figure 361. Figure 361 ABC IM Service Access Deny - 3 Profiles Added

7 Select the Access List of the IPxDSL module to open Figure 362.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Prohibit A Specific Subscriber To Access ABC IM Service

461

Figure 362 ABC IM Service Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Access List

8 Select the WAN port and click Edit. Apply all three profiles to Outbound of WAN port as shown in Figure 363.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

462

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Figure 363 ABC IM Service Access Deny - IPxDSL Module - Applying Profiles to Outbound

9 The result is shown in Figure 364. Access control configuration for PPPoE access denial is complete.

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

Prohibit A Specific Subscriber To Access ABC IM Service

463

Figure 364 ABC IM Service Access Deny - Complete

Conclusion

The scheme prohibits a specific subscriber to use ABC IM service. Network administrator can also shut down a specific port used by ABC IM in order to prohibit ABC IM service.

July 2006

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

464

APPENDIX A: ACCESS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

iAN8K B1000 Operations Manual

July 2006

UTStarcom, Inc. USA 1275 Harbor Bay Parkway Alameda, CA 94502, USA Tel. 510-864-8800 Fax. 510-864-8802

China No. 368 Liuhe Road, Hi-Tech Industry Development Zone, Binjiang, Hangzhou 310053, PRC +86-571-81920000

India 805 Signature Towers II, South City I Gurgaon, Haryana 122001, India +91 124 5166100

Japan Shiba Koen Parktower 9F/10F 2-11-1 Shiba-koen, Minato-ku Tokyo 105-0011 JAPAN +81-3-6430-8600

Europe Campus Kronberg 7 Kronberg, 61476 Germany +49 (617) 3946-3460

Latin America 2801 SW 149th Ave Suite 100 Miramar, FL 33027, USA 954-447-3077

About UTStarcom

www.utstar.com

Headquartered in the United States with sales, support, and manufacturing facilities worldwide, UTStarcom designs, manufactures, sells, and installs an integrated suite of wireless and wireline access network and switching systems. UTStarcoms complete suite of network equipment gives telecommunication service providers the means to cost-effectively provide efficient and scalable voice, data, and Internet services around the globe. Copyright 2006 UTStarcom, the UTStarcom logo, !-Volution, AIRSTAR, AN-2000, AN-FTTB, CommWorks, the CommWorks logo, iAN, iCell, Internode, Intranode, iPATH, ISP, MovingMedia, mSwitch, Next Generation Network Technology. Now, NGDLC, PAS, PAS Wireless, Seamless World, Softexchange, Sonata, Sonata Access Tandem, Sonata HLR, Sonata IP, Sonata MSC, Sonata WLL, Telos, Total Control, Unitech, WACOS, WICOPS, WLL, and Xtreme IP are registered trademarks or trademarks of UTStarcom, Inc. and its subsidiaries.